中考英语专项复习及练习

中考英语专项复习及练习

中考英语专项复习1 名词 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1．可数名词和不可数名词的用法； ‎ ‎2．名词所有格的构成及用法；‎ ‎3．近义名词的辨析。‎ ‎【名师点睛】‎ 一、名词的数 ‎ ‎1．单数和复数 ‎　 可数名词有单数和复数两种形式。复数形式通常是在单数形式后加词尾“-s”构成，其主要变法如下：‎ ‎　（1）一般情况在词尾加-s，例如：book→books，girl→girls，boy→boys，pen→pens,doctor→doctors, boy→boys。‎ ‎　（2）以s，x，ch，sh，结尾的词加-es，例如：bus→buses，class→classes，box→boxes，watch→watches，brush→brushes。 ‎ ‎　（3）以ce, se, ze,（d）ge结尾的名词加s，例如：orange—oranges。‎ ‎　（4）以辅音母加y结尾的词变“y”为“i”再加-es,例如：city→cities, factory→factories, country→countries, family→families。但要注意的是以元音字母加y结尾的名词的复数形式只加s，如：boy→boys, day→days。‎ ‎　（5）以o结尾的词多数都加-es。例如:hero→heroes，potato→potatoes，tomato→tomatoes,但词末为两个元音字母的词只加-s。例如：zoo→zoos，radio→radios，还有某些外来词也只加-s，例如：photo→photos，piano→pianos。‎ ‎　（6）以f或fe结尾的词，多数变f为v再加-es，例如：knife→knives，leaf→leaves, half→halves。‎ ‎　　（7）少数名词有不规则的复数形式，例如：man→men，woman→women，tooth→teeth，foot→feet，child→children，mouse→mice。‎ ‎　　【注意】与man和woman构成的合成词，其复数形式也是-men和-women。例如：an Englishman，two Englishmen。但German不是合成词，故复数形式为 Germans；man, woman等作定语时，它的单复数以其所修饰的名词的单复数而定，如：men　workers， women teachers。‎ ‎　　有个别名词单复数一样，例如：Chinese，Japanese，sheep，deer，fish等。但当fish表示不同种类的鱼时，可以加复数词尾。‎ ‎　（8）单数形式但其意为复数的名词有：people, police等。‎ ‎　（9）数词+名词作定语时，这个名词一般保留单数形式，中间加连字符。例如：ten-minute’s walk, an 8-year-old girl, a ten-mile walk。‎ ‎　（10）还有些名词仅有复数形式，如：trousers，clothes，chopsticks，glasses，goods，ashes，scissors，compasses。‎ ‎　（11）只用作单数的复数形式的名词有：‎ ‎　　科学名词：physics, mathematics/maths ‎　　游戏名称：bowls ‎　　专有名词：the United States, Niagara Fall ‎　　其他名词：news, falls ‎2．不可数名词“量”的表示方法 ‎　　在英语中，不可数名词如果要表示“量”的概念，可以用以下两种方法：‎ ‎　（1）用much, a little, a lot of/lots of, some, any等表示多少，例如：‎ ‎　　The rich man has a lot of money．‎ ‎　　There is some milk in the bottle．‎ ‎　　Is there any water in the glass？‎ ‎　　I don't like winter because there's too much snow and ice．‎ ‎　（2）用a piece of 这类定语，例如：‎ ‎　　a piece of paper， a piece of wood ，a piece of bread ，a bottle of orange， a glass of water（milk）， a cup of tea， a bag of rice， three bags of rice ‎　　如果要表示“两杯茶”、“四张纸”这类概念时，在容器后加复数，例如：two cups of tea ‎　　four pieces of paper　　three glasses of water ‎　　不可数名词也可用a lot of, lots of, some, any, much等来修饰。‎ 二、名词的所有格 ‎ ‎　　名词所有格，用来表示人或物的所有，以及领属关系。‎ ‎1. 表示有生命的名词的所有格其单数形式是加 's,其复数形式是s'，例如：a student's room, students' rooms, father's shoes。‎ ‎2. 如其结尾不是s的复数形式仍加 's，如：Children's Day。‎ ‎3. 在表示时间、距离、长度、重量、价格、世界、国家等名词的所有格要用 's，例如：a twenty minutes' walk，ten miles' journey，a boat's length，two pounds' weight, ten dollars' worth。‎ ‎4. 无生命名词的所有格则必须用of结构，例如：a map of China，the end of this term，the capital of our country, the color of the flowers。‎ ‎5. 双重所有格，例如：a friend of my father's。‎ ‎【注意】‎ ‎　　如果两个名词并列，并且分别有 's，则表示“分别有”，例如：John's and Mary's rooms（约翰和玛丽各有一间，共两间）；Tom's and Mary's bikes（两人各自的自行车）。‎ ‎　　两个名词并列，只有一个's，则表示“共有”，例如：John and Mary's room（约翰和玛丽共有一间）；Tom and Mary's mother（即Tom与Mary是兄妹）。‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1.（上海徐汇区中考试题）‎ ‎ These _________ have saved many children’s lives.‎ ‎ A. woman doctors B. women doctor C. women doctors D. woman doctor ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是名词作定语时的变化。woman 作定语时要和被修饰的名词保持数的一致。‎ ‎2. (河北省中考试题)‎ This is _________ bedroom. The twin sisters like it very much.‎ ‎ A. Anne and Jane B. Anne’s and Jane’s C. Anne’s and Jane D. Anne and Jane’s 答案：D。该题考查并列名词的所有格。两人共有一个房间时，只在后面的名词后加’s。‎ ‎3.吉林省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Are there any ________ on the farm? ---Yes, there are some.‎ ‎ A. horse B. duck C. chicken D. sheep ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是特殊名词的复数形式。从谓语动词来判断，主语应该是复数名词。只有sheep可用作复数名词。‎ ‎4. (佛山市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---What would you like to drink, ________ or orange? ---Orange, please.‎ ‎ A. hamburger B. chip C. tea ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是名词的类别。三种东西中只有tea能喝。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1．--- Where have you been, Tim?　 --- I’ve been to ______.‎ ‎　A. the Henry house B. the Henry family ‎ ‎　C. The Henry’s home D. Henry’s ‎2．In England, if ____ is in the middle of the day, the evening meal is called supper.‎ ‎　A. food B. lunch C. breakfast D. dinner ‎3．You looked for it twice, but you haven’t found it. Why not try ____ .‎ ‎　A. three times B. a third time C. the third time D. once ‎4．--- They are thirsty. Will you please give them ______ ?　 --- Certainly.‎ ‎　A. some bottles of waters B. some bottles of water ‎　C. some bottle of water D. some bottle of waters ‎5．Mike hurt one of his ______ in the accident yesterday.‎ ‎　A. tooth B. feet C. hand D. ear ‎6．There is some _______ on the plate.‎ ‎　A. cakes B. meat C. potato D. pears ‎7．In England, the last name is the _______ .‎ ‎　A. family name B. middle C. given name D. full name ‎8．The are going to fly _______ to Beijing.‎ ‎　A. Germen B. Germany C. Germanys D. Germans ‎9．The______ has two _______ .‎ ‎　A. boys; watches B. boy; watch C. boy; watches D. boys; watch ‎10．The little baby has two _______ already.‎ ‎　A. tooth B. tooths C. teeth D. teeths ‎11．What’s your _______ for being late again?‎ ‎　A. idea B. key C. excuse D. news ‎12．--- It’s dangerous here. We’d better go out quickly.‎ ‎　　--- But I think we should let _______ go out first.‎ ‎　A. woman and children B. women and child C. woman and child D. women and children ‎13．--- You can see Mr. Smith if there is a sign “_______ ”on the door of his shop.‎ ‎　　--- Thanks.‎ ‎　A.ENTRANCE B.BUSINESS HOURS C.THIS SIDE UP D.NO SMOKING ‎14．Are they going to have a picnic on _______ ?‎ ‎　A. Children’s Day B. Childrens’s Day C. Childrens Day D. Children Day ‎15．Where are the students? Are they in _______ ?‎ ‎　A. the Room 406 B. Room 406 C. the 406 Room D. 406 Room 二. 根据下列句子的情景及所给汉语注释，写出所缺单词。‎ ‎1. We’ve got a lot of new ________(杂志) in our school library.‎ ‎2. Please turn to another _______（频道）, I don’t like this show.‎ ‎3. Yesterday the _________(航班) to London was put off because of the bad weather.‎ ‎.4. Autumn is my favourite____________ (季节) ‎ ‎5. ---How many _______(小刀) do you have? ---Three.‎ ‎6. __________ are widely used in the modern world. ‎ ‎7. June 1st is __________(儿童) Day.‎ ‎8. Mary, would you please tell me your new ________(地址) so that I can write to you.‎ ‎9. ---Does this piece of ______(音乐) sound nice? ---Yes. It’s wonderful!‎ ‎10. May 12th is the International _______(护士) Day. Let’s say “ Thanks” to them for their work.‎ 三. 根据句意和所给首字母写出所缺的单词。‎ ‎1. “What’s your n_______?” “Li Lei.”‎ ‎2. How many d_______ does your uncle have?‎ ‎3. Please close the w______. It’s cold outside.‎ ‎4. If you want study English well, you must pay attention to your p________.‎ ‎5. A computer is one of the greatest i_________ in the world.‎ ‎6. Zhang Hui is very excited. He will go to Japan with his p_______ during the Spring Festival. ‎ ‎7. At the a______ of seven, the lonely girl had to work to make living.‎ ‎8. It’s only about an h_____ flight from Qingdao to Beijing by air.‎ ‎9. Health is more important to me than m_______.‎ ‎10. Be careful! It’s d__________ to run across the street now.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一．1.D 2.B 3.B 4.B 5.B 6.B 7.A 8.D 9.C 10.C 11.C 12.D 13.B 14.A 15.B ‎ 二．1.magazines 2.Channel 3. flight 4.season 5. knives 6. Computers 7. Children’s 8. address 9. music 10. Nurses’‎ 三．1.name 2.daughters 3. window 4. pronunciation 5. inventions 6.parents 7. age 8. hour’s 9. money 10. dangerous 中考英语专项复习2 冠词和数词 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1.不定冠词a与an的用法 ‎2.定冠词the的用法 ‎3."零"冠词 ‎4.基数词的用法 ‎5.序数词的用法 ‎【名师点睛】‎ 一. 冠词的用法 冠词是虚词，放在名词之前，用来说明名词指的人或事物。冠词有两种。‎ A(an)叫不定冠词，the叫定冠词。A用在辅音之前，an用在元音之前。‎ ‎1. 不定冠词的用法 ‎(1) a和an均用在单数名词之前，表示某一类人或事物。例如：John is a student.‎ Mary is an English teacher.‎ ‎(2) 指某一类人或事物中的任何一个。例如:A steel worker makes steel.‎ Pass me an apple, please.‎ ‎(3) 指某人或某物，但不具体说明何人或和物。例如：A student wants to see you.‎ A girl is waiting for you outside.‎ ‎(4) 表示“每一”的意思，相当于every。例如：Take the medicine three times a day.‎ They go to see their parents once a week.‎ ‎2. 定冠词用法 ‎ (1) 特指某（些）人或某（些）事物。例如：The book on the desk is an English dictionary.‎ Beijing is the capital of China.‎ ‎ (2) 指说话人和听话人都熟悉的人或事物。例如： Open the door, please. Jack is in the library.‎ ‎ (3) 上文提到过的人或事物。例如：Yesterday John’s father bought him a new bike. The bike cost him 200 yuan.‎ ‎ (4) 表示世界上独一无二的事物。例如：The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.‎ ‎ (5) 用在序数词和形容词最高级之前。例如：Shanghai is the biggest city in China.‎ January is the first month of the year.‎ ‎ (6) 用在某些形容词之前，表示某一类人或事物。例如：The nurse is kind to the sick.‎ We should take good care of the old.‎ ‎ (7) 用在某些专有名词之前和某些习惯用语中。例如： the Great Wall, the Summer palace, in the morning, in the open air等。‎ ‎(8) 用在姓氏复数之前，表示“某某一家人”，“某某夫妇”。例如： the Browns, the Whites等。‎ ‎3. 不用冠词的情况(零冠词)‎ ‎ (1) 某些专有名词，抽象名词和物质名词前一般不用冠词。例如：China, Canada, Japanese, glass, water, love等。‎ ‎ (2) 名词前已有作定语用的this, that, my, your, whose, some, any, no, each, every等代词时，不用冠词。例如： That is my cap. I have some questions. Go down this street.‎ ‎(3) 复数名词表示一类人或事物时，不用冠词。They are workers. We are students.‎ ‎(4) 称呼语前不用冠词，表示头衔和职务的名词前也不加冠词。例如：I don’t feel well today, Mother. Bush was made president of the U.S.‎ ‎(5) 三餐饭的名称前，球类活动，学科和节目名词前，常不用冠词。例如：I have lunch at home.‎ He often plays football after class.‎ We have English and maths every day.‎ ‎(6) 在某些固定词组里，名词之前常不用冠词。例如：By air, at night, at home, go to bed, go to school, on foot, from morning till night 等。‎ 二. 数词的用法 数词分基数词和序数词。基数词表示数目，序数词表示顺序。‎ ‎1. 基数词的用法 ‎(1) 基数词在句中主要用作主语、宾语、定语、表语、同位语，例如： Thirty of them are Party members.（主语）‎ ‎--- How many would you like？　 --- Three ，please．（作宾语）‎ The nine boys are from Tianjing.（定语）‎ ‎　Six plus four is ten.（表语）　 We four will go with you.（同位语） ‎ ‎(2) 表示一个具体数字时，hundred, thousand, million一律不用复数；在表示一个不确定数字时则用复数。例如：Our country has a population of 1,300 million people.‎ There are three thousand students in our school.‎ After the war, thousands of people became homeless.‎ Maize is the most important food crop for millions of people in the world.‎ They arrived in twos and threes．‎ ‎(3) 表示“……十”的数词的复数形式可用来表示人的岁数或年代，例如： He is in his early thirties． He died still in his forties．　　 This took place in 1930s．‎ ‎(4) 表示时刻用基数词。例如：We get up at six. The workers begin work at eight.‎ ‎ 表示“几点过几分”，用介词past,但须在半小时以内。例如：ten past ten, a quarter past nine, half past twelve ‎ 表示“几点差几分”用介词to, 但分数须在半小时以上。例如：twenty to nine, five to eight, a quarter to ten ‎ 表示“几点几分”还可直接用基数词。例如：seven fifteen, eleven thirty, nine twenty ‎ 2. 序数词的用法 ‎　 （1）序数词主要用作定语，前面要加定冠词，例如： The first truck is carrying a food basket．‎ John lives on the fifteenth floor．‎ ‎　（2）序数词有时前面可加不定冠词来表示“再一”，“又一”这样的意思，例如：‎ We'll have to do it a second time． Shall I ask him a third time？ When I sat down，a fourth man rose to speak．‎ ‎（3）由几个序数词和基数词在拼写时不对应，很容易写错，应特别注意。它们是：one---first, two---second, three---third, five---fifth, eight---eighth, nine---ninth, twelve---twelfth。‎ ‎（4）表示年，月，日时， 年用基数词表示，日用序数词表示。例如：1949年十月一日读作: October (the) first, nineteen sixty ‎2004年九月十日读作：September (the) tenth, two thousand and four ‎（5）表示分数时，分子用基数词表示，分母用序数词表示。分子大于1时，分母加-s。例如：three fourths, one second, two fifths ‎（6）序数词有时用缩写形式：‎ ‎ first→1st second→2nd third→3rd fourth→4th twenty-second→22nd ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (上海市徐汇区中考试题)‎ ‎ About ________ students in our class can describe that place in English.‎ ‎ A. three-fifths B. three-fifth C. third-five D. third-fifths ‎ 答案：A。该题考查的是分数的表示法。分子用基数词表示，分母用序数词表示。分子大于1时，分母应加-s，因此应选A。‎ ‎2. (河北省中考试题)‎ ‎ Nine _______ pounds a week? That’s very good.‎ ‎ A. hundred of B. hundreds of C. hundreds D. hundred ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是数词的用法。Nine hundred是一个具体的数量，这是数词不能用复数形式，后面也不能加of。所以应选D。‎ ‎3. (北京市海淀区中考试题)‎ ‎ We often have sports after class, and I like to play _______ basketball.‎ ‎ A. a B. an C. the D. 不填 ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是冠词的用法。球类运动之前不加冠词，因此应选D。‎ ‎4. (江西省中考试题)‎ ‎ This is _______ song I’ve told you about. Isn’t it _______ beautiful one?‎ ‎ A. the; the B. a; a C. the; a D. a; the ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是冠词的用法。第一个空是特指，特指我给你说过的那首歌，第二个空是表示某一个类别。所以应选C。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎ 1. This morning I had ________ egg and a bottle of milk for my breakfast.‎ ‎ A. an B. a C. the D./‎ ‎ 2. ---What’s the matter with you?‎ ‎ ---I caught ________ bad cold and had to stay in ________.‎ ‎ A. a;/ B. a; the C. a; a D. the; the ‎ 3. ---Have you seen _______ pen? I left it here this morning.‎ ‎ ---Is it ________ black one? I think I saw it somewhere.‎ ‎ A. a; the B. the; the C. the; a D. a; a ‎ 4. _______ sun is shining brightly. A. A B. An C. The D. /‎ ‎ 5. There is _______ “h” in the word hour. A. a B. the C. an D./‎ ‎ 6. Did you enjoy your stay in Xian? Yes. I had _______ wonderful time.‎ ‎ A. a B. an C. the D. /‎ ‎ 7. ______ sun is bigger than _______ earth.‎ ‎ A. A; the B. A; an C. The; an D. The; the ‎ 8. There is _______ apple and some pears on the table. A. the B./ C. a D. an ‎ 9. David has _______ cat. It’s very nice. A. a B. an C. the D./‎ ‎ 10. I’m reading _______ novel. It is _______ interesting story.‎ ‎ A. a; an B. a; a C. the; the D. /; an ‎ 11. It is said that SARS has killed more than ________ people worldwide.‎ ‎ A. three hundreds B. three hundreds’ C. three hundred’s D. three hundred ‎ 12. ---How many workers are there in your factory? ---There are two __________.‎ ‎ A. hundreds B. hundred C. hundred of D. hundreds of ‎ 13. ---Which is the smallest number of the four? ---_______________.‎ ‎ A. Two-thirds B. A half C. A quarter D. Three-fourths ‎ 14. ---What do you think of a war, Li Ming?‎ ‎ ---I’ve no idea. But it’s a fact that _______ people had to leave their hometown during the War on Iraq.‎ ‎ A. three thousands B. thousand of C. thousands of D. several thousands ‎ 15. We all think that the _______ century will bring us more hopes.‎ ‎ A. twenty-first B. twentieth-first C. twenty-one D. twentieth-one ‎ 16. ---Can you write the number eighty-five thousand, six hundred and twenty-six?‎ ‎ ---Yes, it is __________.‎ ‎ A. 856620 B. 85626 C. 58662 D. 58626‎ ‎ 17. When was the PRC founded? It was founded on _________.‎ ‎ A. July 1, 1921 B. October 1, 1949 C. August 1, 1927 D. May 1, 1922‎ ‎18. I was 8 years old when my father was 31. This year my father is twice my age. How old am I?‎ ‎ A. 21 B. 22 C. 23 D. 24‎ ‎19. _______ Chinese are looking for ways to learn English well before Beijing 2008 Olympics.‎ ‎ A. Thousand B. Thousands C. Thousand of D. Thousands of ‎ 20. Both of the two rulers are broken. I want to buy a _______one.‎ ‎ A. three B. third C. forth D. /‎ 二. 句子改错：下面各句A, B, C, D中有一处错误，请指出并改正。‎ ‎1. May is a fifth month of the year.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎2. The film has been on for half a hour.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎3. The boys and the girls often play the foot ball in the afternoon.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎4. It looks rain. Why not take a umbrella with you?‎ ‎ A B C D ‎5. Li Mei often gives us some good information by the e-meil.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎6. We’ve planted two hundreds trees in the centre of our city this year.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎7. Five million of dollars is a lot of money.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎8. There are thousand of children in the park now.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎9. By the end of twenty century, the world population had passed six billion.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎10. Over three fifth of the world’s books and newspapers are written in English.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.A 2.A 3.D 4.C 5.C 6.A 7.D 8.D 9.A 10.A11.D 12.B 13.C 14.C 15.A 16.B 17.B 18.C 19.D 20.B 二. 1.B a→the 2.D a→an 3.C 去掉the 4.C a→an 5.D去掉the 6.B two hundreds→two hundred 7.B 去掉of 8.B thousand→thousands 9.B twenty→twentieth 10.A three fifth→three fifths 中考英语专项复习3 代词 代词是代替名词、形容词和数词的词。按其意义、特征及其在句中的作用分为：人称代词、物主代词、指示代词、反身代词、相互代词、疑问代词、不定代词和关系代词等。‎ 一. 人称代词 ‎　1.人称代词的人称、数和格，如下表所示。 ‎ ‎　2.人称代词有主格和宾格之分。通常主格作主语，宾格作宾语。如：‎ ‎　 I like table tennis. （作主语）Do you know him?（作宾语）‎ ‎3.人称代词还可作表语。作表语时用宾格。如：---Whos is knocking at the door?---It’s me.‎ ‎4.人称代词在than之后与其他人或事物进行比较时，用主格和宾格都可以。如：He is older than me.He is older than I am.‎ 二. 物主代词 ‎　1.表示所有关系的代词叫物主代词。物主代词分形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词。‎ ‎　2. 形容词性物主代词的作用相当于形容词，可在句中作定语。例如：‎ ‎　 Our teacher is coming to see us.　 This is her pencil-box.‎ ‎　3. 名词性物主代词的作用相当于名词，在句中可用作主语、宾语和表语。‎ ‎　　 Our school is here, and theirs is there.（作主语）‎ ‎　 --- Is this English-book yours? （作表语）　 --- No. Mine is in my bag.‎ ‎　 I've already finished my homework. Have you finished yours? （作宾语）‎ 三. 指示代词 ‎　 指示代词包括：this，that，these，those。 ‎ ‎1. this和these一般用来指在时间或空间上较近的事物或人，that和those 则指时间和空间上较远的事物或人，例如：　 This is a pen and that is a pencil．‎ ‎　 We are busy these days．　 In those days the workers had a hard time．‎ ‎2. 有时that和those指前面讲到过的事物，this 和these则是指下面将要讲 ‎ 到的事物，例如：I had a cold. That's why I didn't come. ‎ What I want to say is this ; pronunciation is very important in learning English．‎ ‎3. 有时为了避免重复提到的名词，常可用that或those代替，例如：Television sets made in Beijing are just as good as those made in Shanghai．‎ ‎4. this 在电话用语中代表自己，that 则代表对方。例如：Hello! This is Mary. Is that Jack speaking?‎ 四. 反身代词 ‎　 英语中用来表示"我自己"，"你自己"，"他自己"，"我们自己"，"你们自己"等意义的代词称为反身代词，也有人称之为自身代名词，其形式如表所示。‎ ‎ 反身代词可以在句中作宾语，表语，同位语。‎ ‎　 1. 作宾语，表示动作的承受者就是动作的发出者，主语和宾语指同一个人 或一些人。He called himself a writer． Would you please express yourself in English?　‎ ‎2. 作表语。 It doesn't matter．I'll be myself soon． The girl in the news is myself． ‎ ‎　 3. 作主语或宾语的同位语，表示亲自或本人。‎ ‎　 I myself washed the clothes．（=I washed the clothes myself.）（作主语同位语）‎ ‎　 You should ask the teacher himself．（作宾语同位语）‎ 五. 不定代词 ‎　 不是指明代替任何特定名词的代词叫做不定代词，在句中可作主语、表语、宾语和定语。现将几个常用的不定代词举例说明如下：‎ ‎1. some与any的区别 ‎1）some多用于肯定句，表示“一些，几个”作形容词时，后面可以接①不可数名词+单数动词；②可数名词+复数动词。‎ ‎ Look! Some of the students are cleaning the library.‎ ‎ . Some rice in the bag has been sold out.‎ ‎2）any多用于疑问句、条件句和否定句中，表示“一些，任何”用作形容词时，后面可以接①不可数名词+单数动词；②可数名词+复数动词。‎ ‎ If you have any questions, please ask me.‎ ‎ There isn't any orange in the bottle.‎ ‎ Have you got any tea?‎ ‎3）any和some也可以作代词用，表示“一些”。any多用于疑问句或否定句中，some多用于肯定句中。How many people can you see in the picture? I can't see any.‎ If you have no money, I'll lend you some.‎ ‎ 注意：与some, any结合的词如something, somebody, someone, anything, anyone, anybody在肯定句、否定句、疑问句、条件句中的用法，大致和some, any的用法相同。‎ ‎2. few, a few, little, a little在用法上的区别 ‎1）用作形容词：‎ a few虽少，但有几个 few不多，几乎没有 a little，虽少，但有一点 little不多，没有什么 ‎ I'm going to buy a few apples.‎ ‎ He can speak only a little Chinese.‎ ‎ There is only a little milk in the glass.‎ ‎ He has few friends.‎ ‎ They had little money with them.‎ ‎ 2）a little和little也可以用作副词，a little表示“有点，稍微”，little表示“很少”。‎ ‎ I'm a little hungry. (修饰形容词hungry) Let him sleep a little. (修饰动词sleep)‎ ‎ Mary, go a little faster, please. (修饰副词比较级) She slept very little last night.‎ ‎3. other, the other, another, others, the others的区别。‎ ‎1）other可以作形容词用，后面可以跟单数或复数名词，意思是“其他的、别的”。‎ ‎ Where are his other books? I haven't any other books except this one.‎ ‎2）other也可以用作代词，与冠词the连用构成“the other”，表示两个人或物中的“另一个”。常与one搭配构成“one ..., the other ...”句型。He has two brothers. One is 10 years old , the other is 5 years old. She held a ruler in one hand and an exercise-book in the other.‎ ‎3）other作代词用时，可以有复数“others”，泛指“另外的人或物”。常与some搭配构成“some ...., others ...”句型。‎ ‎ Some went to the cinema, others went swimming.‎ ‎ This coat is too large. Show me some others, please.‎ ‎4）“the others”表示特指某范围内的“其他的人或物”。‎ ‎ We got home by 4 o'clock, but the others didn't get back until 8 o'clock.‎ ‎ In our class only Tom is English, the others are Chinese.‎ ‎5）another可以作形容词用，修饰后面的名词，意为“另一个”，还可以跟代词one.‎ ‎ You can see another ship in the sea, can't you?‎ ‎ Mary doesn't want to buy this skirt. Would you please show her another one?‎ ‎6）another也可以作代词用，表示“另一个”。I'm still hungry after I've had this cake. Please give me another.‎ ‎4. every与each的区别：‎ ‎1）. each可作代词和形容词，而every只能用作形容词，如可以说each of these dictionaries或each one of these dictionaries, 但不能说every of these dictionaries, 该用every one of these dictionaries。 ‎ ‎2）. each可指两个或两个以上中间的每一个，而every只可指三个或三个以上中间的每一个，不能指两个中每一个。如： 可以说each of my eyes, 不可说every one of my eye但可说every one of my toes(脚趾) 。‎ ‎3）. each通常用来指若干固定数目中的每一个，而every往往指“任何一个”如： ‎ Each girl sitting over there is my student. “坐在那里的每一女孩子”指若干固定数目中的每一个，故用each。Every man must do his best. “人人都尽最大的努力”泛指任何一个人，因而用every。 ‎ ‎4）. every和not连用，即“every…not”或“not…every”构成部分否定，表示“并非每一个”的意思，each则无此结构。‎ ‎5）. every+ 基数词+ 复数名词=every+ 序数词+ 单数名词，作“每(多少)”解，但each不能用于这一结构中。 如： every three days？？ 每三天或每隔两天，相当于 every third ‎ day。‎ ‎6）. every two days, every second day都作“每隔一天”解，但在实际应用中人们都用every other day来表示这一意思，every two days也有人讲，而every second day则少用的。 ‎ ‎7）. 也可以说every few days, 相当于汉语的“隔些日子”。 ‎ ‎8）. each 可以与other构成固定的搭配，即each other意思为“彼此、相互、互相”的意思，而every则不能Each与every都有“每个”的意思，但二者含义及语法功能不同，主要区别是：‎ ‎1）. each既可用作形容词，又可用作代词，在句中可以作定语，主语、宾语、同位语、状语等。例如：Each student has his own dictionary . （形容词，定语）每个学生都有自己的字典。Each has his good point . （代词，主语）各人有各自的优点。Our headteacher had a talk with each of us . （代词，宾语）我们的班主任与我们每个人都谈了话。‎ The students each have a desk . （代词，同位语）学生们每人有一张书桌。‎ The children can have a bag each . （副词，状语）孩子们每人可带一只提包。‎ ‎2）. each与every都可用作形容词，在句中作定语，但each更强调个人或个别，every更强调全体或全部。比较：I know each number of your family .我认识你们家的每个成员。‎ I know every number of your family .我认识你们家的每个成员。‎ ‎3）. each指两个或两个以上的人或事物中的“每个”；every是指许多人或事物的“全体”，与all的意思相近。试译：这条街上每边都有很多商店。［误］There are many shops on every side of the street .［正］There are many shops on each side of the street .我给她父母每人一件礼物。［误］I gave a present to every one of her parents .［正］I gave a present to each of her parents .‎ ‎4）. 指上下文提到过的确定数目中的“每一个”时，要用each；如果上下文没有提及时，不能用each，要用everyone等。试译：我认为这三个答案个个都正确。［误］I think every answer of the three is right .［正］I think each of the three answers is right .我看见人人都忙着工作。［误］I saw each was busy with his work .［正］I saw everyone was busy with his work .‎ ‎5）. each 单独作主语或each、every修饰的单数名词作主语时，谓语动词为单数形式，但each of them作主语时，谓语动词用单数或复数形式都可以。例如：Each / Each person / Every person is living a happy life now .人人都过着幸福生活。Each of them are / is wearing full dress .他们个个都身着盛装。‎ ‎ 6）. every可以与not连用构成部分否定，意思是“并不/非人人”，而each则不可以与not连用。全部否定是no one ，意思是“个个都不”、“没有人”等。例如：人人都不喜欢这个电视剧。［误］Each / Everyone / Every one of them doesn’t like the TV play .［正］No one likes the TV play .‎ ‎7）. each与other可构成相互代词，every则不可以。例如：We should take care of each other and help each other .我们应该互相关心，互相帮助。‎ ‎8）. 表示“每隔……”、“每……”，要用“every＋基数词＋复数名词”。这种结构中的every不能用each替代。例如：They’ll choose one out of every ten girls .他们将在每十个姑娘里挑选一个。We hand in our homework every three days .我们每隔两天（每三天）交一次作业。注意：“每三天或每隔两天”，也可以写作“every third day”，即，若用序数词时，后接单数名词。再如every four weeks / fourth week（每四周/每隔三周），every other day / second day / two days（每隔一天），every other line（每隔一行）等。‎ ‎5. all和both的用法。‎ ‎1）all指三者以上，或不可数的东西。谓语动词既可以用单数，也可以用作复数。在句中作主语、表语、宾语、同位语和定语。‎ ‎ All of us like Mr Pope. 我们都喜欢Pope先生。（作主语） = We all like Mr Pope. (作同位语)‎ ‎ All the water has been used up. (作主语)‎ ‎ That's all for today. (作表语)‎ ‎ Why not eat all (of) the fish? (作宾语)‎ ‎ All the leaders are here. (作定语)‎ ‎2）both作代词。‎ ‎①与其他名词或代词并列出现，表示“两个都”。 Lucy and Lily both agree with us.‎ ‎ They both passed on their sticks at the same time. How are your parents? They're both fine.‎ ‎ ②与“of +代词（或名词）”连用，表示“两者都”。‎ ‎ Both of them came to see Mary. Both of the books are very interesting.‎ ‎ ③单独使用，表示“两者（都）”。 Michael has two sons. Both are clever.‎ ‎ I don't know which book is the better, I shall read both.‎ ‎3）both用作形容词，放在名词之前，修饰该名词，表示“两者都”。‎ ‎ Both his younger sisters are our classmates.‎ ‎ . There are tall trees on both sides of the street.‎ 六. 相互代词 ‎ 表示相互关系的代词叫做相互代词。相互代词有each other 和one another两种形 式。在当代英语中，each other和one another没有什么区别。相互代词可在句中作宾语，定语。作定语用时，相互代词用所有格形式。‎ ‎　 We should learn from each other / one another. （作宾语）‎ ‎　 Do you often write to each other / one another? （作宾语）‎ ‎　 We often borrow each other's / one another's books. （作定语）‎ ‎　 The students corrected each other's / one another's mistakes in their homework. （作定语）‎ 七. 疑问代词 疑问代词有who，whom，whose，what和which等。疑问代词用于特殊疑 问句中，一般都放在句首，并在句子中作为某一句子成分。例如：‎ Who is going to come here tomorrow? （作主语）What is that? (作表语)‎ Whose umbrella is this? (作定语)Whom are you waiting for? (作宾语)‎ 八.关系代词 关系代词是一种引导从句并起连接主句和从句作用的代词。关系代词有 who, whose, whom, that, which. 它们在句中可用作主语,表语,宾语,定语. 在主句中,它们还代表着从句所修饰的那个名词或代词。例如：‎ I hate people who talk much but do little.‎ I’m looking at the photograph which you sent me with your letter.‎ With the money that he had saved, he went on with his studies.‎ Do you know the lady who is interviewing our headmaster?‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (北京市中考试题) Mary, please show ________ your picture. ‎ ‎ A. my B. mine C. I D. me ‎ 答案：D。该提考查的是人称代词和物主代词的用法。在本题中，动词show的后面要跟双宾语，空白处缺少一个间接宾语，所以应选me。‎ ‎2. (北京市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---What’s on TV tonight? Is there _________ interesting? ---I’m afraid not.‎ ‎ A. something B. anything C. nothing D. everything ‎ 答案：B。该提考查的是不定代词的用法。这是一个疑问句。在疑问句中，通常用anything。‎ ‎3. (上海徐汇区中考试题) ________ of them has his own opinion.‎ ‎ A. Both B. Some C. Every D. Each ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是不定代词用法。因为谓语动词是单数形式，所以Both和Some都不对。Every 不能作主语，所以只有Each合适。‎ ‎4. (安徽省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Where is my pen? ---Oh, sorry. I have taken _______ by mistake.‎ ‎ A. yours B. his C. mine D. hers ‎ 答案：A。该题考查的是物主代词的用法。根据题干的背景，我们可以判断出错拿的钢笔应该是对方的，所以选yours。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1. Tom, Please pass ________ the glasses. I want to read the newspapers.‎ ‎ A. you B. me C. him D. her ‎2. The English novel is quite easy for you. There are ______ new words in it.‎ ‎ A. a little B. little C. a few D. few ‎3. ---You want ________ sandwich? ---Yes, I usually eat a lot when I’m hungry.‎ ‎ A. other B. another C. others D. the other ‎4. The doctors and nurses are doing their best to fight SARS. They think more of others than _______. ‎ ‎ A. they B. them C. themselves D. theirs ‎5. ---Which do you prefer, a bottle of orange or a bottle of milk?‎ ‎ ---______________, thanks. I’d like a cup of tea.‎ ‎ A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. None ‎6. ---Oh! I came in a hurry and forgot to bring food. ---Never mind. You can have ________.‎ ‎ A. us B. ours C. you D. yours ‎7. ---Can I come this evening or tomorrow morning?‎ ‎ ---_______ is OK. I’m free today and tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. None ‎8. ---How are you going to improve _______ this term? ---Work harder than last term.‎ ‎ A. ourselves B. myself C. himself D. yourself ‎9. ---Could you tell me _______ she is looking for? ---Her cousin, Susan.‎ ‎ A. that B. whose C. who D. which ‎10. ---Is _______ here? ---No. Li Lei and Han Mei have asked for leave.‎ ‎ A. everybody B. somebody C. anybody D. nobody ‎11. Paul has _______ friends except me, and sometimes he feels lonely.‎ ‎ A. many B. some C. few D. more ‎12. If you want to book a round-trip ticket, you’ll have to pay ______ $ 30.‎ ‎ A. more B. other C. the other D. another ‎13. ---Do you live by yourself, Mr Wang?‎ ‎ ---Yes. I have two sons. But ______ of them lives with me. They are now studying in America?‎ ‎ A. neither B. both C. none D. either ‎14. ---Have you sent your parents an E-mail telling them you arrived safe?‎ ‎ ---No. _______ of them can use a computer.‎ ‎ A. None B. Both C. Neither D. All ‎15. Who taught _______ English last term? Was _____ Mr. Smith?‎ ‎ A. you; it B. you; he C. your; it D. your; that ‎16. ---That woman has a bag in her right hand. What’s in her _____ hand?‎ ‎ A. another B. other C. one D. the other ‎17. We decided to go for a field trip with some friends of _______.‎ ‎ A. us B. our C. ours D. ourselves ‎18. ---Is there a bus to the zoo? ---I’m afraid there’s _______ bus to the zoo.‎ ‎ A. no B. any C. some D. none ‎19. You forgot your dictionary? You may have _______.‎ ‎ A. me B. my C. mine D. myself ‎20. This is ______ classroom. Where is _______?‎ ‎ A. our; them B. us; they C. our; theirs D. ours; theirs 二. 用所给代词的适当形式填空 ‎1. This is not my pencil-box. _______ ( I ) is in the bag.‎ ‎2. Trees are planted in ______ ( we ) country every year, which makes our country more and more beautiful.‎ ‎3. ---Is that bike Miss Gao’s? ---Yes, it is ______(she) . Beautiful, isn’t it?‎ ‎4. Help ______ (you) to some fruit, Jack.‎ ‎5. ---Who taught your brother to surf? ---Nobody. He learnt all by _______ (he).‎ ‎6. Their English teacher is from America, but ______ (we) is from England.‎ ‎7. Mary’s answer is different from ________ ( I ).‎ ‎8. ---My watch keeps good time. What about _______(you)?‎ ‎ ---Mine? Oh, two minutes slow.‎ ‎9. Sam is my brother. Do you like to play with ______ (he)?‎ ‎10. Did you enjoy _______ (you), Mary and Kate?‎ 三. 用适当的代词填空 ‎1. The old man has two sons. One is a worker, _______ is a teacher.‎ ‎2. Students are usually interested in sports. Some like running; some like swimming; _______ like ball games.‎ ‎3. Let’s go and have a drink. We’ve got _______ time before the train leaves.‎ ‎4. We were all very tired, but _______ of us would like to have a rest.‎ ‎5. ______ of the twins are in our class.‎ ‎6. Boys, don’t touch the machines, or you may hurt _______.‎ ‎7. It is said there is going to be ________ important in the CCTV news.‎ ‎8. We couldn’t buy anything because _______ of the shops opened at that time.‎ ‎9. They didn’t learn _______ new in this lesson.‎ ‎10. ---Why is ______ easy for such a young girl to learn three foreign languages so well?‎ ‎ ---Because Britain, Germany and France are all very near ______ country.‎ 四. 用适当的疑问代词和关系代词填空 ‎1. ______ is the population of the world today?‎ ‎2. _______ jumped the longest of all in the long jump?‎ ‎3. --- _______ colour is your mother’s dress? ---It’s black.‎ ‎4. ---______ is your car? ---The red one in front of the tree.‎ ‎5. ---______ of the following can you often find on a medicine bottle?‎ ‎ ---I know, sir. It’s instruction.‎ ‎6. The necklace ______ she is wearing is beautiful.‎ ‎7. Do you know the person _______ lost his bike?‎ ‎8. Most people _______ live in less developed countries are quite poor.‎ ‎9. The boy ______ is helping the old man is John’s brother.‎ ‎10. People ______ use credit cards to buy things online should be very careful ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.B 2.D 3.B 4.C 5.B 6.B 7.A 8.D 9.C 10.A 11.C 12.D 13.A 14.C 15.A 16.B 17.C 18.A 19.C 20.C二.1.Mine 2.our 3.hers 4.yourself 5.himself 6.ours 7.mine 8.yours 9.him 10.yourselves 三. 1..the other 2.others 3.a little 4. none 5.Both 6.yourselves 7.something 8.none 9.anything 10.it; her四. 1. What 2. Who 3. What 4. Which 5. Which 6. that/ which 7. that/ who 8. who/that 9. who/ that 10. who/ that 中考英语专项复习4 形容词和副词 专题４形容词和副词 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1. 形容词的用法；‎ ‎2. 副词的用法；‎ ‎3. 形容词和副词原级、比较级、最高级的用法；‎ ‎4. 形容词和副词在句中的区别和位置。‎ ‎【名师点睛】‎ ‎1. 形容词的用法 ‎ ‎(1) 形容词在句中作定语, 表语, 宾语补足语。 例如：‎ ‎ Our country is a beautiful country. （作定语）‎ ‎ The fish went bad. （作表语）‎ We keep our classroom clean and tidy. （作宾语补足语）‎ ‎(2) 形容词修饰something, anything, nothing, everything等不定代词时,形容词放在名词后面。 ‎ ‎　 I have something important to tell you. ‎ ‎　 Is there anything interesting in the film. ‎ ‎(3) 用 and 或 or 连接起来的两个形容词作定语时一般把它们放在被修饰的名词后面。起进一步解释的作用。 ‎ ‎　 Everybody, man and woman, old and young, should attend the meeting. ‎ ‎　 You can take any box away, big or small. ‎ ‎(4) the＋形容词表示一类人或物 ‎ The rich should help the poor.‎ ‎2. 副词的用法 ‎(1) 副词在句中可作状语,表语和定语。 ‎ He studies very hard. （作状语）Life here is full of joy. （作定语）‎ When will you be back? （作表语）‎ 副词按其用途和含义可分为下面五类：‎ ‎1)时间副词 时间副词通常用来表示动作的时间。常见的时间副词有：now today, tomorrow, yesterday, before, late, early, never, seldom, sometimes, often, usually, always等。例如：‎ He often comes to school late. What are we going to do tomorrow? ‎ He is never been to Beijing.‎ ‎2)地点副词 地点副词通常用来表示动作发生的地点。常见的地点副词有：here, there, inside, outside, home, upstairs, downstairs, anywhere, everywhere, nowhere, somewhere, down, up, off, on, in, out等。例如：I met an old friend of mine on my way home. He went upstairs. ‎ Put down your name here.‎ ‎3)方式副词 方式副词一般都是回答“怎样的？”这类问题的，其中绝大部分都是由一个形容词加词尾-ly构成的, 有少数方式副词不带词尾-ly, 它们与形容词同形。常见的方式副词有：anxiously, badly, bravely, calmly, carefully, proudly, rapidly, suddenly, successfully, angrily, happily, slowly, warmly, well, fast, slow, quick, hard, alone, high, straight, wide等。例如：The old man walked home slowly. Please listen to the teacher carefully. The birds are flying high.‎ He runs very fast.‎ ‎4)程度副词 程度副词多数用来修饰形容词和副词，有少数用来修饰动词或介词短语。常见的程度副词有：much, (a) little, a bit, very, so, too, enough, quite, rather, pretty, greatly, completely, nearly, almost, deeply, hardly, partly等。例如：Her pronunciation is very good. She sings quite well.‎ I can hardly agree with you.‎ ‎5)疑问副词是用来引导特殊疑问句的副词。常见的疑问副词有：how, when, where, why等。例如：How are you getting along with your studies? Where were you yesterday?‎ Why did you do that?‎ ‎(2)副词在句中的位置 ‎1)多数副词作状语时放在动词之后。如果动词带有宾语，则放在宾语之后。例如：Mr Smith works very hard. She speaks English well.‎ ‎2)频度副词作状语时，通常放在行为动词之前，情态动词，助动词和be动词之后。例如：‎ He usually gets up early. I’ve never heard him singing. She is seldom ill.‎ ‎3)程度副词一般放在所修饰的形容词和副词的前面, 但enough作副词用时，通常放在被修饰词的后面。例如：It is a rather difficult job. He runs very fast. He didn’t work hard enough.‎ ‎4)副词作定语时，一般放在被修饰的名词之后。例如：‎ On my way home, I met my uncle.‎ The students there have a lot time to do their own research work.‎ ‎(3)部分常用副词的用法 ‎1) very, much 这两个副词都可表示“很”，但用法不同。Very用来修饰形容词和副词的原级，而much用来修饰形容词和副词的比较级。例如：‎ She is a very nice girl I’m feeling much better now.‎ Much可以修饰动词，而very则不能。例如：‎ I don’t like the idea much.‎ They did not talk much.‎ ‎2) too, either 这两个副词都表示“也”，但too用于肯定句，either用于否定句。例如：‎ She can dance, and I can dance, too.‎ I haven’t read the book and my brother hasn’t either.‎ ‎3) already, yet already一般用于语肯定句，yet一般用于否定句。例如：‎ He has already left.‎ Have you heard from him yet?‎ He hasn’t answered yet.‎ ‎4) so, neither so和neither都可用于倒装句， 但so表示肯定，neither表示否定。‎ 例如：‎ My brother likes football and so do I.‎ My brother doesn’t like dancing and neither do I.‎ ‎3. 形容词和副词的比较级和最高级 ‎(1) 两个人或事物的比较时（不一定每一方只有一个人或一个事物），用比较级。‎ ‎　　 Our teacher is taller than we are. ‎ ‎　　 The boys in her class are taller than the boys in your class.‎ ‎(2) most 同形容词连用而不用 the,表示 "极,很,非常, 十分"。 ‎ ‎　　 It's most dangerous to be here. 在这儿太危险。 ‎ ‎(3) "The+形容词比较级..., the+形容词比较级..."表示 " 越... 就越..."。 ‎ ‎　　 The more you study, the more you know. ‎ ‎(4) " 形容词比较级 + and + 形容词比较级 ", 表示 " 越来越... "。 ‎ ‎　　 It's getting hotter and hotter. ‎ ‎(5) 主语+谓语(系动词)+as+形容词原形+as+从句。表示两者对比相同。 ‎ ‎　　 This box is as big as mine. ‎ ‎(6) the + 形容词 表示某种人。 He always helps the poor. ‎ ‎(7) 形容词和副词最高级用于三个或三个以上的人和物进行比较。 ‎ ‎　　 Shanghai is one of the biggest cities in China.‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (北京市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Which is ________, the sun, the moon or the earth? ---Of course the moon is.‎ ‎ A. small B. smaller C. smallest D. the smallest ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是形容词的比较等级的用法。因为是太阳，地球和月亮三者进行比较，选用形容词的最高级，而且最高级之前要加定冠词the。所以选D。‎ ‎2. (上海徐汇区中考试题)‎ ‎ He has made _______ progress this term than before.‎ ‎ A. little B. less C. fewer D. much ‎ 答案 B。该题考查的是形容词比较等级的用法。因为是现在和过去进行比较，所以要用比较级，又因为是修饰不可数名词，只能用less, 而不能用fewer。‎ ‎3. (江西省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---What delicious cakes! ---They would taste _______ with butter.‎ ‎ A. good B. better C. bad D. worse ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是形容词的比较等级。答话人的意思应该是“如果加上点黄油，这些蛋糕会更好吃。”‎ 这里就有一种比较：加黄油和不加黄油。既然是比较，就要用比较级。因为这里讲的是好吃和更好吃，所以C,D要舍去，而选better。‎ ‎4. (河北省中考试题)‎ ‎ Bob never does his homework ________ Mary. He makes lots of mistakes.‎ ‎ A. so careful as B. as carefully as C. carefully as D. as careful as ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是形容词和副词的用法区别。因为该词修饰的是动作“做家庭作业”，所以要用副词。又因为表示一方不如另一方要用句型“not as+副词原级+as”，所以只能选B。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1．There are many young trees on sides of the road.‎ ‎　 A. every 　B. each 　C. both 　D. all ‎2．--- It’s so cold today.　 --- Yes, it’s than it was yesterday.‎ ‎　 A. more cold 　B. more colder 　C. much colder 　D. cold ‎3．Little Tom has friends, so he often plays alone.‎ ‎　　A. more B. a little　 C. many 　D. few ‎4．She isn’t so at maths as you are.‎ ‎　 A. well　 B. good　 C. better　 D. best ‎5．Peter writes of the three.‎ ‎　 A. better　 B. best　 C. good　 D. well ‎6．He is enough to carry the heavy box.‎ ‎　 A. stronger　 B. much stronger　 C. strong　 D. the strongest ‎7．I bought exercise-books with money.‎ ‎　 A. a few; a few 　B. a few; a little 　 C. a little; a few D. a little; a little ‎8．The box is heavy for the girl carry.‎ ‎　 A. too; to　 B. to; too　 C. so; that　 D. no; to ‎9．The ice in the lake is about one meter . It’s strong enough to skate on.‎ ‎　 A. long　 B. high　 C. thick　 D. wide ‎10．Wu Lin ran faster than the other boys in the sports meeting.‎ ‎　 A. so 　B. much 　C. very D. too ‎11. Jone looks so _______ today because she has got an “A” in her maths test.‎ ‎ A. happy B. happily C. angry D. angrily ‎12. The smile on my father’s face showed that he was ______ with me.‎ ‎ A. sad B. pleased C. angry D. sorry ‎13. ---Mum, could you buy me a dress like this?‎ ‎ ---Certainly, we can buy ______ one than this, but ______ this.‎ ‎ A. a better; better than B. a worse; as good as ‎ C. a cheaper; as good as D. a more important; good as ‎14. ---This digital camera is really cheap!‎ ‎ ---The ______ the better. I’m short of money, you see.‎ ‎ A. cheap B. cheaper C. expensive D. more expensive ‎15. If you want to learn English well, you must use it as _______ as possible.‎ ‎ A. often B. long C. hard D. soon ‎16. Paul has ______ friends except me, and sometimes he feels lonely.‎ ‎ A. many B. some C. few D. more ‎17. English people _____ use Mr. Before a man’s first name.‎ ‎ A. never B. usually C. often D. sometimes ‎18. ---One more satellite was sent up into space in China in May.‎ ‎ ---Right. The government spoke ______ that.‎ ‎ A. highly for B. high of C. well of D. highly of ‎19. ---Remember this, children. ______ careful you are, ______ mistakes you will make.‎ ‎ ---We know, Miss Gao.‎ ‎ A. The more; the more B. The fewer; the more ‎ C. The more; the fewer D. The less; the less ‎20. I have ________ to do today.‎ ‎ A. anything important B. something important ‎ C. important nothing D. important something 二. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 ‎1. My purse was stolen on the bus yesterday. __________ (Fortunate), there was no money in it.‎ ‎2. Mobile phones are _________ (wide) used in most of the cities in China.‎ ‎3. He put on his coat and went out ________ (quick).‎ ‎4. She is ______ (good) than Li Ping at swimming.‎ ‎5. A lot Chinese people are _______ (pride) of Yao Ming, a famous basketball star in NBA.‎ ‎6. To our surprise, he suddenly returned on a cold ______ (snow) night.‎ ‎7. Allie asked me ______ (polite) to put the things away.‎ ‎8. It’s snowing hard. You must drive ________(careful).‎ ‎9. The earth we live on is _______ (big) than the moon.‎ ‎10. Hainan is a very large island. It’s the second ________ (large) island in China.‎ 三. 用适当的形容词或副词填空(首字母已给出)‎ ‎1. A large number of mouths must be fed in those less d________ countries.‎ ‎2. That evening Beethoven played the music for the girl as well as u______.‎ ‎3. Hawaii is f_______ its beautiful beaches.‎ ‎4. He often takes an a______ part in the sports meeting and he can get very good results each time.‎ ‎5. The performance was so w_______ that everyone gave a long and loud applause(鼓掌).‎ ‎6. Jiefang Road is the b_____ street in our city.‎ ‎7. She lay a______ for hours thinking over her business.‎ ‎8. I like ball games very much, but my f_______ sport is playing basketball.‎ ‎9. The boy is too l______ . He doesn’t want to do anything.‎ ‎10. The dictionary is very u________ . It will help you a lot.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.C 2.C 3.D 4.B 5.B 6.C 7.B 8.A 9.C 10.B 11.A 12.B 13.C 14.B 15.A 16.C 17.A 18.D 19.C 20.B二. 1. Fortunately 2. widely 3.quickly 4. better 5. proud 6. snowy 7. politely 8. carefully 9. bigger 10. largest 三. 1. developed 2. usual 3. famous 4. active 5. wonderful 6. busiest 7. awake 8. favourite 9. lazy 10. useful 专题５介词和连词 ‎1. 常用介词及其词组的主要用法和意义；‎ ‎2. 常用动词、形容词与介词、副词的固定搭配及其意义。‎ ‎3. 并列连词and, but, or, so等的主要用法；‎ ‎4. 常用的从属连词的基本用法 ‎ ‎1. 介词的功能 介词是一种虚词，用来表示名词或相当于名词的其它词语句中其它词的关系，不能单独使用。介词可与名词或相当于名词的其它词构成介词短语。介词短语可在句中作定语，状语，表语和宾语补足语。例如：The boy over there is John’s brother. (定语)The girl will be back in two hours. (状语)Our English teacher is from Australia. (表语)Help yourself to some fish. (宾语补足语)‎ ‎2. 常用介词的用法辨析 ‎（1）表时间的介词 ‎1）at, in， on 表示时间点用at。例如：at six o’clock, at noon, at midnight。表示在某个世纪，某年，某月，某个季节以及早晨，上午，下午，晚上时，用in。例如：in the ninettenth century, in 2002, in may, in winter, in the morning, in the afternoon等。表示具体的某一天和某一天的上午，下午，晚上时，用on。例如：on Monday, on July 1st, on Sunday morning等。‎ ‎2） since, after 由since和after 引导的词组都可表示从过去某一点开始的时段，但since词组表示的时段一直延续到说话的时刻，因而往往要与现在完成时连用。而after词组所表示的时段纯系过去，因而要与一般过去时连用。例如：I haven’t heard from him since last summer.‎ After five days the boy came back.‎ ‎3） in, after in与将来时态连用时，表示“过多长时间以后”的意思，后面跟表示一段时间的词语。After与将来时态连用时，后面只能跟表示时间点的词语。After与过去时态连用时，后面才能跟表示一段时间的词语。例如：He will be back in two months. He will arrive after four o’clock.‎ He returned after a month.‎ ‎（2）表示地点的介词 ‎1）at, in, on at一般指小地方；in一般指大地方或某个范围之内；on往往表示“在某个物体的表面”。例如：He arrived in Shanghai yesterday.‎ They arrived at a small village before dark.‎ There is a big hole in the wall.‎ The teacher put up a picture on the wall.‎ ‎2） over, above, on over, on和above都可表示“在……上面”，但具体含义不同。Over表示位置高于某物，在某物的正上方，其反义词是under。 above也表示位置高于某物，但不一定在正上方，其反义词是below。On指两个物体表面接触，一个在另一的上面。例如：‎ There is a bridge over the river.‎ We flew above the clouds.‎ They put some flowers on the teacher’s desk.‎ ‎3） across, through across和through均可表示“从这一边到另一边”，但用法不同。Across的含义与on有关，表示动作在某一物体的表面进行。Throgh的含义与in有关，表示动作是在三维空间进行。例如：The dog ran across the grass. The boy swam across the river.‎ They walked through the forest. I pushed through the crowds.‎ ‎4) in front of, in the front of in front of 表示“在某人或某物的前面”，在某个范围以外；in the front of 表示“在……的前部”，在某个范围以内。例如：There are some tall trees in front of the building.‎ The teacher is sitting in the front of the classroom.‎ ‎3. 介词的固定搭配 ‎ 介词往往同其他词类形成了固定搭配关系。记住这种固定搭配关系，才能正确使用介词。‎ ‎（1）介词与动词的搭配 listen to , laugh at, get to, look for wait for, hear from, turn on, turn off, worry about, think of, look after, spend…on…, 等。‎ ‎（2）介词与名词的搭配 on time, in time, by bus, on foot, with pleasure, on one’s way to, in trouble, at breakfast, at the end of, in the end等。‎ ‎（3）介词与形容词的搭配 be late for, be afraid of, be good at, be interested in, be angry with, be full of, be sorry for等。‎ ‎4. 连词的功能 用来连接词，短语，从句或句子的词叫连词。连词是一种虚词，在句中不能单独使用。连词可分为两类：并列连词和从属连词。‎ ‎5. 并列连词 并列连词用来连接具有并列关系的词，短语或句子。常见的并列连词有：‎ ‎(1)表并列关系的and, both…and, not only…but also, neither…nor等。‎ ‎(2)表选择关系的or, either…or等。‎ ‎(3)表转折关系的but, while等。‎ ‎(4)表因果关系的for, so等。‎ ‎6. 从属连词 从属连词用来引导从句。常见的从属连词有：‎ ‎(1)引导时间状语从句的after, before, when, while, as, until, till, since, as soon as等。(2)引导条件状语从句的if, unless等。‎ ‎(3)引导原因状语从句的because, as, since等。‎ ‎(4)引导目的状语从句的so that, in order that等。‎ ‎(5)引导让步状语从句的though, although, even if等。‎ ‎(6)引导结果状语从句的so that, so…that, such…that等。‎ ‎(7)引导比较状语从句的than, as…as等。‎ ‎ (8)引导名词从句的that, if , whether等。‎ ‎7. 常用连词的用法辨析 ‎（1） while, when, as 这三个连词都可引导时间状语从句，但用法有所不同。‎ ‎1) 当某事正在进行的时候，又发生了另一件事。While, when, as 都可用来引导表示“背景”的时间状语从句。例如：As/When/While I was walking down the street I noticed a police car.‎ ‎2) 当两个长动作同时进行的时候，最常用的是while。例如：While mother was cooking lunch, I was doing my homework.‎ ‎3) 当两个动作都表示发展变化的情况时，最常用的是as。例如：As children get older, they become more and more interested in things around them.‎ ‎4) 当两个短动作同时发生时，或表示“一边…一边…”时，最常用as。例如：‎ Just as he caught the fly, he gave a loud cry.‎ She looked behind from time to time as she went ‎5) 当从句的动作先于主句的动作时，通常用when。例如：When he finished his work, he took a short rest.‎ ‎6) 当从句是瞬间动作，主句是延续性动作时，通常用when。例如：When John arrived I was cooking lunch.‎ ‎（2）as, because, since , for 这四个词都可表原因，但用法有区别。‎ ‎1) 如果原因构成句子的最主要部分，一般用because。因此，because引导的从句往往放在句末。例如：I stayed at home because it rained.‎ ‎---Why aren’t you going?---Because I don’t want to.‎ ‎2) 如果原因已被人们所知，或不如句子的其它部分重要，就用as或since。Since比as稍微正式一点。As和since 引导的从句一般放在句子的开头。例如：As he wasn’t ready, we left without him. Since I have no money, I can’t buy any food.‎ ‎3) for用来补充说明一种理由，因此，for引导的从句几乎可以放在括号里。For引导的句子不放在句子的开头。例如：I decided to stop and have lunch----for I was feeling quite hungry.‎ ‎（3）if, whether if和whether都可作“是否”讲，在引导宾与从句是一般可互换。例如：I wonder whether (if) you still study in that school. I don’t know whether (if) he likes that film.‎ 在下列情况下，只能用whether,不能用if：‎ ‎1) 引导主语从句时。例如：Whether he will come to the party is unknown. ‎ ‎2) 引导表语从句时。例如：The question is whether I can pass the exam.‎ ‎3) 在不定式前。例如：I haven’t made up my mind whether to go there or not.‎ ‎（4）so…that, such...that ‎1) so…that中的so是个副词，其后只能跟形容词或副词，而such...that中的such是个形容词，后接名词或名词短语。例如：I’m so tired that I can’t walk any farther.‎ It was such a warm day that he went swimming.‎ ‎2) 如果在名词之前有many, much, little, few时，用so,不用such。例如：He has so little education that he is unable to get a job.‎ I have had so many falls that I am black and blue all over.‎ ‎（5）either…or…, neither…nor, not only…but also…‎ 这三个连词词组都可连接两个并列成分。当它们连接两个并列主语时，‎ 谓语动词要随相邻的主语变化。例如：Either you or he is wrong.‎ Neither he nor his children like fish.‎ Not only the teacher but also the students want to buy the book.‎ ‎（6）although, but 这两个连词不能用在同一个句子中。例如：我们不能说“Although he is ‎ over sixty, but he works as hard as others.”这个句子应改为：Although he is over sixty, he works as hard as others.或He is over sixty, but he works as hard as others.‎ ‎（7）because, so 这两个连词同样不能用在同一个句子中。例如：我们不能说“Because John ‎ was ill, so I took him to the doctor.” 这个句子应改为Because John was ill, I took him to the doctor.或John was ill, so I took him to the doctor.‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1.（北京市中考试题）‎ ‎ ---When will Mr Black come to Beijing? ---___________ September 5.‎ ‎ A. On B. To C. At D. In ‎ 答案：A。表示时间的介词的用法。表示某一天用介词on。‎ ‎2. (安徽省中考试题)‎ ‎ The boys felt sad as they lost ________ the girls in the talk show.‎ ‎ A. by B. in C. to D. on ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是介词和动词的固定搭配。lose表示输给谁的时候用介词to。应选C。‎ ‎3. (吉林省中考试题) ---I like riding fast. It’s very exciting.‎ ‎ ---Oh! You mustn’t do it like that, ________ it may have an accident.‎ ‎ A. and B. or C. so D. but ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是并列连词的用法。答语的意思是“你不要那样做，否则会发生事故的。”在这四个并列连词中，只有or含有这样的意思，所以应选B。‎ ‎4. (天津市中考试题) John fell asleep ________ he was listening to the music.‎ ‎ A. after B. before C. while D. as soon as ‎ 答案：C。该题考查的是引导时间状语从句的常用从属连词的用法。本句的含义是“约翰在听音乐的时候睡着了。”表示在干某事时发生了某个事情” 通常用while。因此应选C。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎ 1. We traveled overnight to Paris and arrived _______ 5 o’clock ______ the morning.‎ ‎ A. on; in B. at; in C. at; on D. in; on ‎ 2. Where’s Lily? We are all here _______ her.‎ ‎ A. beside B. about C. except D. with ‎ 3. She sent her friend a postcard _______ a birthday present.‎ ‎ A. on B. as C. for D. of ‎ 4. Jack has studied Chinese in this school _______ the year of 2000.‎ ‎ A. since B. in C. on D. by ‎ 5. ---What is a writing brush, do you know? ---It’s _______ writing and drawing.‎ ‎ A. with B. to C. for D. by ‎ 6. English is widely used ______ travellers and business people all over the world.‎ ‎ A. to B. for C. as D. by ‎ 7. ______ the help of my teacher, I caught up with the other students.‎ ‎ A. Under B. In C. With D. On ‎ 8. Hong Kong is ______ the south of China, and Macao is ______ the west of Hong Kong.‎ ‎ A. in; to B. to; to C. to; in D. in; in ‎ 9. ---You’d better not go out now. It’s raining.‎ ‎ ---It doesn’t matter. My new coat can keep ______ rain.‎ ‎ A. in B. of C. with D. off ‎ 10. Japan lies ______ the east of China.‎ ‎ A. to B. in C. about D. at ‎ 11. ---Will the foreigners have any problems talking with Chinese in 2008?‎ ‎ ---I don’t think so. Now ______ the young ______ the old can speak some English.‎ ‎ A. either…or B. not only… but also ‎ C. neither…nor D. both…or ‎ 12. We didn’t catch the train _______ we left late.‎ ‎ A. so B. because C. but D. though ‎ 13. Tom failed in the exam again _______ he wanted to pass it very much.‎ ‎ A. if B. so C. though D. as ‎ 14. I won’t believe that the five-year-old boy can read five thousand words ______ I have tested him myself.‎ ‎ A. after B. when C. if D. until ‎ 15. The book was so interesting that he had read it for three hours ______ he realized it.‎ ‎ A. when B. until C. after D. before ‎ 16. ---This dress was last year’s style.‎ ‎ ---I think it still looks perfect ______ it has gone out this year.‎ ‎ A. so that B. even though C. as if D. ever since ‎ 17. Hurry up, _______ you will miss the train.‎ ‎ A. and B. so C. however D. or ‎ 18. The mountain was ______ steep _____ few people in our city reached the top.‎ ‎ A. so…as B. so…that C. as…as D. too…to ‎ 19. ---Do you remember our pleasant journey to Xi’an?‎ ‎ ---Of course. I remember everything ______ it happened yesterday.‎ ‎ A. as soon as B. even though C. rather than D. as if ‎ 20. ______ you can’t answer this question, we have to ask someone else for help.‎ ‎ A. Although B. While C. Whether D. Since 二. 用适当的介词填空 ‎ 1. ---How are you going to the train station to meet your aunt?‎ ‎ ---I’m going there _______ my car.‎ ‎ 2. Mum, today is Mother’s Day. Mike and I want to invite you to have dinner _____ us at Zhonglou Restaurant.‎ ‎ 3. Hangzhou is famous ______ the West Lake.‎ ‎ 4. Today some newly-produced mobile phones can take pictures ______ a camera.‎ ‎ 5. Could you tell me if there is a flight to the capital ______ March, 25th?‎ ‎ 6. We all agree ______ you. Let’s start at once.‎ ‎ 7. There is a big shop ______ the other side of the road.‎ ‎ 8. ---Which necklace have you lost?‎ ‎ ---The one you gave me _____ my birthday.‎ ‎ 9. You should take more exercise. It’s good ______ your health.‎ ‎10. It is clear that fish cannot live _______ water.‎ 三. 用适当的连词填空 ‎ 1. ______ they are brothers, they don’t look like each other at all.‎ ‎ 2. The dress was very expensive, ______ I didn’t buy it.‎ ‎ 3. ---Do you know ______ I could pass the exam? ---Sorry, I’ve no idea.‎ ‎ 4. Mr. Brown knows little Japanese, ______ he can’t understand the instructions on the bottle of the pills.‎ ‎ 5. The war was over about a year ago, ______ the American soldiers in Iraq are still having a ‎ lot of trouble to deal with.‎ ‎ 6. ---Is David at school today? ---No. He is at home _______ he has a bad cold.‎ ‎ 7. _____ Lily _____ Lucy may go with you because one of them must stay at home.‎ ‎ 8. Study hard, _____ you are sure to have a good result in the exam.‎ ‎ 9. Please have a wash _______ you go to bed.‎ ‎ 10. The twins have learned a lot ______ they came to China.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.B 2.C 3.B 4.A 5.C 6.D 7.C 8.A 9.D 10.A11.B 12.B 13.C 14.D 15.D 16.B 17.D 18.B 19.D 20.D 二. 1.in 2.with 3.for 4.like 5.on 6.with 7.on 8.for 9.for 10.without 三. 1.Although/ Though 2.so 3.if/ whether 4.so 5.but 6.because 7.Either…or 8.and 9.before 10.since 专题６动词 ‎1.动词的八种时态的构成及用法；‎ ‎2.动词被动语态的构成及用法；‎ ‎3.非谓语动词的构成及用法；‎ ‎4.近义动词的用法区别。‎ ‎【名师点睛】‎ 一、动词的时态 英语时态用共有十六种时态，其中常用的有8种，它们是：一般现在时、一般过去时、一般将来时、现在进行时、现在完成时、过去进行时、过去完成时和过去将来时。‎ ‎（1）一般现在时的基本用法 ‎1) 经常性或习惯性的动作，常与表示频度的时间状语连用。‎ ‎　 时间状语： every…, sometimes,　at…, on Sunday ‎　 Eg: I leave home for school at 7 every morning.‎ ‎2) 客观真理，客观存在，科学事实。‎ ‎　 Eg: The earth moves around the sun. Shanghai lies in the east of China.‎ ‎3) 表示格言或警句中。 Eg:Pride goes before a fall.‎ ‎【注意】此用法如果出现在宾语从句中，即使主句是过去时，从句谓语也要用一般现在时。‎ 例：Columbus proved that the earth is round..‎ ‎4) 现在时刻的状态、能力、性格、个性。　 Eg: I don't want so much.‎ ‎5) 某些动词如 come, go, move, stop, leave, arrive, be, finish, continue, start 等，在一般现在时句中可用来表示将来肯定会发生的动作。 Eg: The train comes at 3 o'clock. ‎ ‎　 6) 在时间状语从句或条件状语从句中，一般现在时代替一般将来时。 ‎ ‎　　 Eg: I'll help you as soon as you have problem. 　　 Tell Xiao Li about it if you meet him. ‎ ‎（2）一般过去时的用法： 表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间内所发生的动作或情况，通常一般过去式带有表示动作时间状语的词，词组或从句,如 yesterday, the day before last, last week, two days ago 等,上下文清楚时可以不带时间状语。 　　‎ Eg: I worked in that factory last year. ‎ ‎【注意】‎ ‎1) 过去经常反复发生的动作，也可用used to或would加动词原形来表达，例如： I used to go fishing on Sundays.‎ ‎2) “used to”也可用于表示过去曾经存在过的状态。例如： This river used to be clean.‎ ‎（3）一般将来时的用法 ‎1）表示将来的动作或状态。例如：I shall attend the meeting tomorrow. ‎ ‎2）表示将来反复发生的动作或存在的状态。例如：He will go to see his mother every Saturdays.‎ ‎3）表示将来的意愿，决心，许诺， 命令等时常用will，征求对方意见，主语是第一人称时，常用shall。　Eg: I will do my best to catch up with them. Shall I open the door?‎ ‎4）be + going + 动词不定式。也是一种将来时句型，表示打算，计划，最近或将来要作的某事。 Eg: I am going to Beijing next week. ‎ ‎5）be + 动词不定式。表示有职责，义务，可能，约定，意图等。 ‎ Eg: There is to be a meeting this afternoon. 　 We are to meet the guests at the station. ‎ ‎6）be about + 动词不定式，表示马上，很快作某事。 They are about to leave. ‎ ‎（4）现在进行时的用法 ‎ ‎1) 现在进行时的用法表示说话者说话时正在发生或者进行的动作， 它注重现在正在进行的动作，而不管动作从什么时间开始，到什么时间结束。 ‎ Eg: What are you doing now? I am looking for my key. ‎ ‎2) 现在进行时表示目前一段时间内正在进行的动作（但说话时这个动作不一定在进行）。 ‎ Eg: The students are preparing for the examination. ‎ ‎3) 某些动词的现在进行时可以表示即将发生的动作，这些动词有 arrive, come, leave, start等。 ‎ Eg: They are going to Hong Kong tomorrow. ‎ ‎【注意】有些动词一般不可以用于进行时态 ‎①表示状态的动词，尤其是静态动词，如：be, have ‎②表示认识、知觉和情感的动词，如：know, think, hear, find, see, like, want, wish, prefer等。‎ ‎（5）现在完成时的用法 ‎ ‎　 1) 现在完成时表示在说话之前已经完成或刚完成的动作。 ‎ ‎　　 I have bought a ten-speed bicycle. 　 They have cleaned the classroom. ‎ ‎　 2) 现在完成时表示动作从过去开始持续到现在，或者还有可能持续下去的动作或状态。 现在完成时常与for 和 since 引导的短语或从句连用。 ‎ We have lived here since 1976. 　 They have waited for more than two hours. ‎ ‎【注意】一般过去时与现在完成时的区别 ‎　过去时表示过去某时发生的动作或单纯叙述过去的事情，强调动作；现在完成时为过去发生的，强调过去的事情对现在的影响，强调的是影响；一般过去时常与具体的时间状语连用。‎ 试比较：‎ I saw this film yesterday.（强调看的动作发生过了，不涉及现在）‎ I have seen this film. （强调对现在的影响，电影的内容已经知道了。）‎ ‎（6）过去进行时的用法 ‎ 表示过去某时正在进行的状态或动作。例如：I was watching TV when she came to see me. ‎ ‎【注意】‎ 过去进行时和一般过去时都是过去发生的事情，但过去进行时侧重表示过去某一时刻正在进行的动作或所处的状态，强调动作的连续进行，而一般过去时则表示单纯的过去事实，例如：‎ They were building a house last month. （上个月正在建造，建造好与否不知）‎ They built a new house last month. （上个月建造好了，动作已经完成）‎ ‎（7）过去完成时的用法 ‎ 过去完成时表示过去某一时刻或某一动作之前完成的动作或所处的状态，过去完成时常和 by , before 等词组成的短语和从句连用。 ‎ Eg: We had already learned two thousands words by the end of last year. 　　‎ When we arrived at the station, they had waited for more than twenty minutes. ‎ ‎（8）过去将来时的用法 过去将来时表示从过去某个时间看将要发生的动作或存在地状态，过去将来时较多地被运用在宾语从句中。‎ 例如：They were going to have a meeting. I told him that I would see him off at the station.‎ 二、动词的语态：‎ ‎ (一)语态概述 ‎ 英语的语态是通过动词形式的变化表现出来的。英语中有两种语态：主动语态和被动语态。‎ 主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者。例如：Many people speak Chinese.‎ 谓语：speak的动作是由主语many people来执行的。‎ 被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者，即行为动作的对象。例如：Chinese is spoken by many people.主语English是动词speak的承受者。‎ ‎ (二)被动语态的构成 被动语态由"助动词be＋及物动词的过去分词"构成。人称、数和时态的变化是通过be的变化表现出来的。现以speak为例说明被动语态在各种时态中的构成。‎ 十种常见时态的被动语态 ‎ 1. 一般现在时 ‎ 主动语态：do 被动语态：am/ is are /done ‎ ‎ We clean the classroom every day. 我们每天打扫教室。 The classroom is cleaned by us every day. 教室每天都由我们打扫。 Russian is not taught in our school. 我们学校不教俄语。 ‎ ‎ 2. 一般过去时 ‎ 主动语态：did 被动语态：was/were done ‎ We cleaned the classroom yesterday. 昨天我们打扫了教室。 The classroom was cleaned by us yesterday. 昨天教室被我们打扫了。 The window was broken by my son. 窗子是我儿子打破的。 ‎ ‎ 3. 一般将来时 ‎ 主动语态：will/shall do 被动语态：will/shall be done ‎ We will clean the classroom soon. 我们很快要打扫教室。 The classroom will be cleaned soon. 教室很快要被打扫了。 Will the school sports meeting be held next week？ 校运动会将在下星期举行吗？ ‎ ‎ 4. 一般过去将来时 ‎ 主动语态：would do 被动语态：would be done ‎ We told him that we would clean the classroom soon. 我们告诉他我们马上就打扫教室。‎ ‎ We told him that the classroom would be cleaned soon. 我们告诉他教室很快就会被打扫的。‎ ‎ 5. 现在进行时 ‎ 主动语态：am/is/are doing 被动语态：am/is/are being done ‎ We are cleaning the classroom now. 我们现在正在打扫教室。 The classroom is being cleaned now. 教室现在正在被打扫。‎ ‎ 6. 过去进行时 ‎ 主动语态：was/were doing 被动语态：was/were being done ‎ We were cleaning the classroom this time yesterday. 昨天这个时候我们在打扫教室。‎ ‎ The classroom was being cleaned this time yesterday. 昨天这个时候教室正在被打扫 ‎ 7. 现在完成时 ‎ 主动语态：has/have done 被动语态：has/have been done ‎ The classroom looks tidy. We have cleaned it. 教室看起来很整洁。我们已经打扫了。‎ ‎ The classroom looks tidy. It has been cleaned. 教室看起来很整洁。它已经被打扫了 ‎ Many foreign films have been shown on TV since last month. 上个月以来，电视中播放了许多外国影片。‎ ‎ 8. 过去完成时 ‎ 主动语态：had done 被动语态：had been done ‎ The classroom looked tidy. We had cleaned it. 教室看起来很整洁。我们已经打扫过了。‎ ‎ The classroom looked tidy. It had been cleaned. 教室看起来很整洁。它已经被打扫过了。‎ ‎ 9. 将来完成时 ‎ 主动语态：will/shall have done 被动语态：will/shall have been done ‎ We will have cleaned the classroom by five o'clock. 我们将在五点之前打扫完教室。‎ ‎ The classroom will have been cleaned by five o'clock. 教室将在五点以前打扫完。‎ ‎ The new books will have been entered in the register before another parcel arrives. 这些新书在下一批书到来前将登记完毕。‎ ‎ 10. 过去将来完成时 ‎ 主动语态：would have done 被动语态：would have been done ‎ I said we would have cleaned the classroom by 500. 我说我们将在五点之前打扫完教室。‎ ‎ I said the classroom would have been cleaned by 500. 我说教室将在五点以前打扫完。‎ ‎ The headmaster said the article would have been translated by the end of next month. 校长说文章将在下月底翻译好。‎ ‎ (三)被动语态的用法 ‎(1)不知道或没有必要说明动作的执行者是谁。‎ 例如：Some new computers were stolen last night.　一些新电脑在昨晚被盗了。(不知道电脑是谁偷的) ‎ This bridge was founded in 1981.这座桥竣工于1981年。‎ ‎(2)强调动作的承受者，而不强调动作的执行者。 例如：The glass was broken by Mike.玻璃杯是迈克打破的。 This book was written by him.这本书是他写的。　Your homework must be finished on time.你们的家庭作业必须及时完成。‎ ‎ (四)主动语态变被动语态的方法 ‎(1)把主动语态的宾语变为被动语态的主语。‎ ‎(2)把谓语变成被动结构(be＋过去分词) (根据被动语态句子里的主语的人称和数，以及原来主动语态句子中动词的时态来决定be的形式)。‎ ‎(3)把主动语态中的主语放在介词by之后作宾语，将主格改为宾格。例如：All the people laughed at him. He was laughed at by all people. They make the bikes in the factory.‎ The bikes are made by them in the factory. He cut down a tree. A tree was cut down by him.‎ ‎ (五)含有情态动词的被动语态 含有情态动词的主动句变成被动句时，由"情态动词＋be＋过去分词"构成，原来带to的情态动词变成被动语态后"to"仍要保留。例如：We can repair this watch in two days. This watch can be repaired in two days. They should do it at once. It should be done at once.‎ ‎ (六)主动形式表示被动意义: ‎ ‎1. 某些连系动词(如look, sound, smell, feel, taste, prove等)要用主动表被动，因为连系动词为不及物动词，它们没有被动语态形式。例如：The school looks beautiful.‎ ‎ 这所学校看起来很美。Your idea sounds a good one. 你的想法听起来很好。‎ ‎2. 当read, wash, clean, cook, cut, wear等用作不及物动词且表示主语的某种属性时，通常要用主动形式表示被动意义。例如：The cloth washes well. 这种布料好洗。The book sells quickly. 这书销售得快。‎ This shirt will wear very long. 这衬衫可以穿很久。‎ ‎【注】该用法通常与well, easily, slowly, quickly等副词连用，并且在用于以上意思时通常不宜直接使用被动语态形式。不过在某些特殊情况下也可用被动语态，只是含义稍有不同(用主动形式表示主语的属性，用被动形式表示动作执行者所执行的动作)：‎ The sentences read clearly. 这些句子读起来很清楚。(即这句子没有歧义)‎ The sentences are read clearly. 这些句子被读得很清楚。(指读的人读得好)‎ ‎3. 某些表示开始和结束的动词(begin, start, finish, end等)，当主语为事物且不强调动作的执行者时，可用主动语态表示被动意义：‎ When does the concert begin? 音乐会什么时候开始？ The play ended at ten o’clock. 戏10点钟结束。‎ ‎4. 某些“be+形容词+to do”结构中的不定式通常要用主动形式表示被动意义：‎ The question is difficult to answer. 这问题很难回答。Do you think the water is safe to drink? 你认为这水喝起来安全吗? ‎ ‎【注】这类结构的特点是句子主语就是其后不定式的逻辑宾语，按理说其中的不定式要用被动形式，但习惯上却要用主动表被动。这类形容词常见的有dangerous, difficult, easy, hard, impossible, interesting, nice, pleasant, safe等。‎ ‎5. 不定式用于某些动词(如have, have got, get, want, need等)的宾语后作定语时，如果不定式的逻辑主语就是句子的主语，则要用主动形式表示被动意义：‎ I have some letters to write. 我有一些信要写。I want something to drink. 我想喝点什么。‎ I want to get something to read. 我想找点东西阅读。‎ ‎【注】如果不定式的逻辑主语不是句子的主语，则应用被动式，比较：‎ I have something to type. 我有些东西要打(字)。(指自己打字)‎ I have something to be typed. 我有些东西要打(字)。(指请人打字)‎ ‎6. be worth后的动名词要用主动表被动：例如：The film is worth seeing. 这部电影值得看。‎ The machine is not worth repairing. 这台机器不值得修理了。‎ ‎7. 在need, want, require等少数表示“需要”的动词后的动名词用主动形式表被动意义：‎ The child needs looking after. 这小孩需要照看。例如：My hair wants cutting. 我的头发要理了。【注】以上结构中的动名词改用不定式则要用被动式表示被动意义：例如：The child needs to be looked after. 这小孩需要照看。My hair wants to be cut. 我的头发要理了。 ‎ 三、非谓语动词 对非谓语动词的考点是：感官动词后不定式作宾语补足语和动词ing形式作宾语补足语的用法；一些特殊动词的动词不定式作宾语补足语时不带to，但变为被动语态时就要带to；有些动词既可接不定式也可接动词ing形式作宾语，但表达的意思不同。这些都是历年中考的重点。‎ ‎（1）非谓语动词的形式 非谓语动词指的是在句中起名词，形容词或副词作用的动词形式，而不是作谓语的动词形式。 动词的非谓语形式分为动名词，分词，动词不定式。‎ ‎（2）不定式作宾语补足语Father will not allow us to play on the street.　　　　　　　‎ ‎（3）不定式作目的状语He ran so fast as to catch the first bus.　‎ ‎（4）用不定式和分词作补足语都可以的动词 这样的动词有感官动词如：see, hear, look, notice, observe, feel等，使役动词如：have, make, leave, keep, get等。接不定式表示动作的完整性，真实性；+doing 表示动作的连续性，进行性。 I saw him work in the garden yesterday. 昨天我看见他在花园里干活了。(强调"我看见了"这个事实)‎ I saw him working in the garden yesterday.（强调"我见他正干活"这个动作）昨天我见他正在花园里干活。‎ ‎（5）用不带to不定式的情况 使役动词如： let, have, make等和感官动词如： see, watch, hear, listen to, smell, feel, find 等后作宾补，省略to。在被动语态中则to不能省掉。‎ ‎（6）接动名词与不定式意义不同 ‎1) stop to do　停止，中断做某事后去做另一件事。 stop doing　停止做某事。‎ ‎2) forget to do　忘记要去做某事。　(未做) forget doing　忘记做过某事。(已做)‎ ‎3) remember to do 记得去做某事　(未做) remember doing　记得做过某事　 (已做)‎ ‎4) try to do　努力，企图做某事。 try doing　 试验，试着做某事。‎ ‎5) go on to do　做了一件事后，接着做另一件事。go on doing　 继续做原来做的事。‎ ‎6) mean to do　 打算、想mean doing　意味着 四、容易混淆的常用动词的辨析 ‎ (1) say, speak, talk, tell的用法。‎ ‎1) say表示讲话，作为及物动词使用，后跟宾语或宾语从句。He said he would go there.‎ It's time to leave. We have to say goodbye to you.‎ ‎2)speak表示“讲话”，一般作为不及物动词使用，而有时作为及物动词后面跟上各种语言作为宾语。Do you speak English? May I speak to Mr Pope, please?‎ ‎3) talk表示“谈话”，是不及物动词，与to , about, with等连用，才可以接宾语。‎ What are you talking about? Mr Jackson is talking with my father in the office now.‎ ‎4) tell 表示“告诉，讲述”是及物动词，可以带双宾语或复合宾语。She told us an interesting story yesterday. My teacher told me that we would have an English exam the next month.‎ ‎ (2) look, see, watch和watch的用法。‎ ‎1) look强调“看”这个动作，是不及物动词，常与at连用，然后接宾语。‎ Look! The girl is swimming in the lake. Look at the picture carefully. Can you find something unusual?‎ ‎2) see 指“看见”某物，强调的是结果。‎ They can't see the words on the blackboard. Does Lily often go to see a film on Sunday?‎ ‎3) watch 指的是“观看”，“注视”之意。‎ The twins are watching TV now. He will go to watch a volleyball match.‎ ‎4） read指“看书”、“看报”、“阅读”之意。‎ Don't read in the sun. I like to read newspapers when I am free.‎ ‎ (3) borrow, lend和keep的区别：‎ ‎1) borrow意思为“借入”，常常与from连用，是非延续性动词，表示瞬间即能完成的动作。‎ Meimei borrowed a book from the library just now. May I borrow your dictionary?‎ ‎2) lend 是“借出”之意，常常与to连用，同borrow一样，是非延续性动词，只表示瞬间即能完成的动作。‎ Uncle Wany has lent his car to Mr Li. Could you lend us your radio, please?‎ ‎3) keep是“保存”的意思，动作可以延续。‎ How long can the recorder be kept? The farmer kept the pat for two weeks.‎ ‎ (4) bring, take, carry 和get的用法。‎ ‎1) bring意思为“拿来”、“带来”。指将某物或某人从别处“带来”。‎ Bring me the book, please. May I bring Jim to see you next Saturday?‎ ‎2) take意思是“拿走”，“带走”，把某物或某人从这里“带来”或“拿到”某处之意。‎ It looks like rain. Take a raincoat with you. Mother took the little girl to the next room.‎ ‎3) carry 是“带着、搬运、携带”的意思，指随身携带，有背着、扛着、抱着、提着的含义，不表明来去的方向。‎ Do you always carry a handbag? The box is heavy. Can you carry it?‎ ‎4) get是去某处将某物拿回来。‎ Please go to my office to get some chalk. There is no water in the bottle. Why not get some?‎ ‎ (5) wear, put on和dress的区别 ‎1) wear是“穿着”“戴着”的意思，可以用于穿衣服、穿鞋、戴帽子、戴手套、佩戴首饰等，强调“穿着”的状态。‎ Tom always wears black shoes. He wears a raincoat even when it is fine.‎ She doesn't like to wear a red flowers in her hair.‎ ‎2) put on是“穿上”“戴上”的意思，可以用于穿衣服、穿鞋、戴帽等。着重于穿戴的动作。‎ It's cold. You'd better put on your coat. He put on his hat and went out of the room.‎ ‎3) dress可以作及物动词和不及物动词，有“穿着”“打扮”的意思。作“穿着”解时，只用于穿衣服，不用于穿鞋、戴帽、戴手套。作为及物动词用时，它的宾语是人，不是衣服。dress sb. （给某人穿衣服），而wear作“穿着”用时，也是及物动词，但它的宾语是物，不是人，即wear sth.（穿着衣物）。‎ She always dresses well. Get up and dress quickly. Mary is dressing her child.‎ ‎ (6) take, spend 和use的用法。‎ ‎1) take指做某事用多少时间，句型是：It takes/took/ will take + sb. +some time + to do sth.‎ It took me three days to finish the work. It takes only one hour to fly to Shanghai.‎ It will take you a while week to travel thought the forest.‎ ‎2) spend指某人在某事（物）上花费时间或钱。句型是：Someone spends + money/time + on something(in) doing sth.‎ She spent more than 500 yuan on that coat. He didn't spend much time on his lessons.‎ He spent much time (in) correcting students' exercises.‎ Mother spent her evenings (in) washing clothes.‎ ‎3) use表使用工具、手段等。Eg: Do you know how to use the computer? Shall we use your car?‎ ‎ (7)reach, get 和arrive的区别：‎ ‎1) reach是及物动词，后面要直接跟表示地点的名词作宾语。‎ After the train had left, they reached the station We reached the top of the mountain at last.‎ ‎2) get是不及动词，常与to连用，再接名词，后面接表示地点的副词时，不用to，get to常用于口语中。‎ When the students got to the cinema, the film had begun.‎ My sister was cooking when mother got home.‎ ‎3) arrive是不及物动词，表示到达一个小地方时，用arrive at, 到达一个大地方时用arrive in。‎ The soldiers arrived at a small village The foreigners will arrive in Shanghai tomorrow.‎ ‎【专项练习一】‎ ‎( ) 1. -- How long may I ______ your book?‎ ‎--For a week. But you musn’t ______ it to others.‎ A. borrow; lend B. keep; lend C. lend; borrow D. keep; borrow ‎( ) 2. It won’t ______ them much time to fly to Beijing from Shanghai.‎ ‎ A. spend B. use C. take D. pay ‎( ) 3. Mr Wang ______ be in Nanjing now, he went to Beijing only this morning.‎ ‎ A. mustn’t be B. may not C. can’t D. needn’t ‎( ) 4. –Do you like the music the Moonlight Sonata? --Yes, it ______ really beautiful.‎ ‎ A. feels B. sounds C. listens D. hears ‎( ) 5. Lily finished _______ the book yesterday.‎ ‎ A. read B. reading C. to read D. reads ‎( ) 6. Mrs Brown isn’t here. She has to ______ her baby at home.‎ ‎ A. look at B. look for C. look like D. look after ‎( ) 7. I have to go now. please remember to _______ the lights when you leave.‎ ‎ A. turn off B. turn down C. turn up D. turn on ‎ ‎( ) 8. Susan’s parents have bought a large house with a swimming pool. It _______ be very expensive.‎ ‎ A. must B. can C. mustn’t D. can’t ‎( ) 9. –It’s too hot. Would you mind _______ the door? -- _______. Please do it now.‎ ‎ A. to open; OK B. opening; Certainly not C. opening; Of course D. to open; Good idea ‎( ) 10. I want to _______ this book for a month.‎ ‎ A. borrow B. keep C. lend D. get ‎( ) 11. –How many times _______ you _______ to Beijing this year? --Three times.‎ ‎ A. have; been B. had; been C. have; gone D. had; gone ‎( ) 12. What a nice bag! But she _______ only thirty dollars for it.‎ ‎ A. cost B. took C. spend D. paid ‎( ) 13. Cotton _______ nice and soft.‎ ‎ A. is felt B. is feeling C. feel D. feels ‎ ( ) 14. I think this is the best way to solve the problem. Do you _______ me?‎ ‎ A. play with B. hear of C. agree with D. get on well with ‎ ( ) 15. –Guess who is coming to supper. – I don’t know. _______ me.‎ ‎ A. Speak B. Say C. Tell D. Tell ‎ ( ) 16. Please _______ your phones here with you tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. take B. bring C. carry D. lift ‎ ( ) 17. Don’t _______ your lessons. We’ll help you.‎ ‎ A. worry B. worried about C. be worried about D. be afraid ‎ ( ) 18. The window is broken. Try to _______ who broke it.‎ ‎ A. find out B. find C. look D. look for ‎ ( ) 19. He could _______ neither French nor German. So I ______ with him in English.‎ A. speak; talked B. talk; told C. say; spoke D. tell; talked ‎( ) 20. The ticket is on the floor. Would you please _______ for me?‎ ‎ A. pick it up B. pick up it C. pick up them D. pick them up ‎( ) 21. If you don’t know a word, you must _______ the word in a dictionary.‎ ‎ A. look up B. look down C. look over D. look out ‎( ) 22. It’s time for class. We’d better _______.‎ ‎ A. stop to talk B. to stop to talk C. stop talking D. to stop talking ‎( ) 23. There was a strange sound outside. Mary went out and _______ around, but she _______ nothing.‎ ‎ A. looked; saw B. saw; saw C. watched; looked D. looked; find ‎ ( ) 24. The woman _______ the child quickly and took him to hospital.‎ ‎ A. put on B. dressed C. had on D. was wearing ‎ ( ) 25. –Oh, you painted the walls yourself? ‎ ‎ --Yes. It was not hard. The whole work didn’t _______ much.‎ ‎ A. want B. cost C. spend D. pay ‎ ( ) 26. --_______ all your things, Tom! I hate them here and there. –OK, Mum.‎ ‎ A. Put up B. Put on C. Put down D. Put away ‎ ( ) 27. Yuki loves wearing strange hats because she wants people to _______ her.‎ ‎ A. believe B. control C. notice D. visit ‎ ( ) 28. _______! It’s the music of Mozart. Be quiet.‎ ‎ A. Hear B. Sound C. Sing D. Listen ‎ ( ) 29. –The room is so dirty. _______ we clean it? -- Of course.‎ ‎ A. Will B. Would C. Do D. Shall ‎ ( ) 30. We must do something to stop people from _______.‎ ‎ A. to throw litter about B. to throw litter into ‎ C. throwing litter about D. throwing litter into ‎【 参考答案】‎ ‎1—5 BCCBB 6—10 CAABB 11—15 ADDCC 16—20 BCAAA 21—25 ACABB 26—30 DCDDC ‎【专项练习二】‎ ‎ 1. She reached the top of the hill and stopped _______ on a big rock. ‎ ‎　A. to have rested B. resting C. to rest D. rest ‎ ‎　　2. Do you know the boy _______ under the big tree? ‎ ‎　　 A. layB. lain C. laying D. lying ‎ ‎　　3. You’d better ______ your bike _____ at once. It is Monday tomorrow, you know. ‎ ‎　　 A. to have, mend B. have, mended C. have, to mend D. to have, mended ‎ ‎　　4. --- Look! The lights in the classroom are still on. --- Oh, I forgot _______. ‎ ‎　　 A. turning them off B. turn them off C. to turn them off D. having turned them off ‎ ‎　　5. “Can’t you read?” the officer said _______ to the notice. ‎ ‎　　 A. angrily pointing B. and point angrily C. angrily pointed D. point angrily ‎ ‎　　6. The computer center, _______ last year, is very popular among the students in this school. ‎ ‎　　A. open B. opening C. having opened D. opened ‎ ‎　　7. The policeman warned the young man _______ after drinking. ‎ ‎　　A. never to driveB. to never drive C. never driving D. never drive ‎ ‎　　8. --- What’s the language _______ inNew Zealand? --- English. ‎ ‎　　 A. speaking B. spokenC. be spokenD. to speak ‎ ‎　　9. He didn’t feel like _______ out for a walk, because he had caught a cold. ‎ ‎　　 A. to go B. goes C. gone D. going ‎ ‎　　10. Paul doesn’t have to be made _______. He always works hard. ‎ ‎　　A. learnB. to learnC. learned D. learning ‎ ‎　　11. The house is not big enough for us all _______. ‎ ‎　　A. to live in B. to be lived inC. to live D. for living in ‎ ‎　　12. A clock is made for _______ us the time. ‎ ‎　　A. tell B. telling C. to tell D. tells ‎ ‎　　13. You’d better _______ at home all the time. It’s bad for your health. ‎ ‎　　 A. don’t stay B. no to stayC. not stay D. not staying ‎ ‎　　14. The students are busy _______ ready for the exam now. ‎ ‎　　 A. getting B. get C. got D. to get ‎ ‎　　15. The mother asked the boy _______ down the ladder, but he went on _______ instead. ‎ ‎　　 A. come; climbingB. to come; to climb C. to come; climbing D. coming; climbing ‎ ‎　　16. Isthere any time_______ to the museum? ‎ ‎　　 A. going B. to goC. goes D. gone ‎ ‎　　17. The teacher asked the students to close the windows _______ the wind from _______ ‎ ‎　　 the papers away. ‎ ‎　　 A. to stop; blowingB. stopping; blowing C. to stop; blowD. stopped; blow ‎ ‎　　18. A bird was seen _______ into the classroom yesterday. ‎ ‎　　 A. flewB. to flyC. fly D. was flying ‎ ‎　　19. We should do as much as we can _______ water. ‎ ‎　　 A. for saving B. to saveC. save D. saved ‎ ‎　　20. There are many people _______ to buy cars in the modern world. ‎ ‎　　 A. wantB. wantedC. wantingD. to want ‎【 参考答案】1-5 CDBCA6-10DABDB 11-15 ABCAC16-20BABBC ‎【专项练习三】‎ ‎　　1. — I’m too busy _____ to my family. 　　 — Why not call them instead? ‎ ‎　　 A. writingB. to write C. written D. write ‎ ‎　　2. The little boy woke up his father, _______ “Happy Birthday!” ‎ ‎　　A. call B. to call C. called D. calling ‎ ‎　　3. The car _______ in Germany in the 1960s looks old now. ‎ ‎　　A. produced B. producing C. to produce D. which produced ‎ ‎　　4. —What are on show in the museum? —Some pictures _______ by the Africans. ‎ ‎　　A. drawingB. drawn C. drewD. were drawn ‎ ‎　　5. The sick man stayed in bed, _______ very terrible. ‎ ‎　　A. feltB. feeling C. is feeling D. was feeling ‎ ‎　　6. —The boy was seen _____ his bike a moment ago. — I am sorry to hear that. ‎ ‎　　 A. fell offB. to fall off C. fall offD. to fall down ‎ ‎　　7. There’re so many beautiful presents in the shop that I don’t know _______. ‎ ‎　　 A. to choose which one B. what choose C. which one to choose D. to choose what ‎ ‎　　8. — How bad! They still have no ideas how _______ the problem. ‎ ‎　　 — Let’s go to help them. ‎ ‎　 A. solving B. solved C. to solveD. solves ‎ ‎　　9. What is the best way do you think ______ the wild animals? ‎ ‎　　 A. protectingB. to protecting C. protected D. to protect ‎ ‎　　10. —You’d better have your sports jacket _____. It’s too dirty. ‎ ‎　　 —Thanks. I will. ‎ ‎　　 A. to wash B. washed C. washing D. wash ‎ ‎　　11. —The little boy was made _______ English for another hour. — Poor boy! ‎ ‎　　 A. read B. reading C. readsD. to read ‎ ‎　　12. I think it kind _______. ‎ ‎　　 A. of him to help me B. for him to help C. that he help me D. of him helping me ‎ ‎　　13. It’s too hot today. Why not _______ your coat? ‎ ‎　　 A. take on B. to take off C. take off D. taking off ‎ ‎　　14. Boys, don’t forget _____ the windows before you leave the classroom. ‎ ‎　　 A. closingB. closed C. to closing D. to close ‎ ‎　　15. He made it _______ for people ______ the computers by inventing new software. ‎ ‎　　 A. easy, useB. easy, using C. easily, to use D. easier, to use ‎ ‎　　16. All of the plans are very good. I really don’t know _______. ‎ ‎　　 A. which to talk B. which to talk about C. to talk about which D. I asked you for help ‎ ‎　　17. Would you please _______ any noise The baby has just fallen asleep. ‎ ‎　　 A. make B. to make C. not to make D. not make ‎ ‎　　18. —Would you please try _______ late again? — Sorry, I won’t be late again. ‎ ‎　　A. not to beB. to be not C. not beD. be ‎ ‎　　19. The words _______ with “L” aren’t easily forgotten. ‎ ‎　　A. starting B. started C. to startD. whose starting ‎ ‎　　20. Have you got anything _______? ‎ ‎　　A. to open the box B. opening the box with C. opening the boxD. to open the box with ‎ ‎　【参考答案】‎ ‎1-5 BDABB 6-10 BCCDB 11-15 DACDD 16-20 BDAAD ‎【专项练习四】‎ ‎　　1. We must try our best to stop the pollution _______ a happier life. ‎ ‎　　A. from livingB. to live C. living D. live ‎ ‎　　2.--- Hello, what are you reading? --- A book _______ by Bill Gates. ‎ ‎　　 A. writingB. written C. to write D. which written ‎ ‎　　3.--- What do you come here for? --- _______. ‎ ‎　　A. Borrow a CDB. To borrow a CD C. Borrowing a CD D. Borrowed a CD ‎ ‎　　4. Yesterday I heard a story _______by my friend. ‎ ‎　　A. told B. telling C. to tell D. tell ‎ ‎　　5. We can’t help crying after _______ the sad news. ‎ ‎　　A. hearB. heard C. hearingD. to hear ‎ ‎　　6. --- Would you mind _______ for a few minutes? --- No, not at all. ‎ ‎　　 A. wait B. to wait C. waitedD. waiting ‎ ‎　　7. Have you read this book? It’s worth _______. ‎ ‎　　A. to readB. read C. readingD. to be read ‎ ‎　　8. Mr Wang would like me _______ my classmates a talk. ‎ ‎　　A. to give B. giving C. gives D. give ‎ ‎　　9. I find _______ him all about it. ‎ ‎　　 A. necessary to tell B. that necessary to C. necessary it to tell D. it necessary to tell ‎ ‎　　10. It’s very nice _______ you to _______ me about it. ‎ ‎　　A. for; tellB. of; say C. to; speakD. of; tell ‎ ‎　　11. The son wants his mother _______ him up at six o’clock every day. ‎ ‎　　 A. to ringB. ring C. ringsD. ringing ‎ ‎　　12. --- I often use Hotmail to send e-mails. ‎ ‎　　--- ReallyWould you please show me_______ it? ‎ ‎　　 A. how can I use B. what can I use C. how to use D. what to use ‎ ‎　　13. Tell the boy _______ out of the window. ‎ ‎　　 A. not to look B. to not look C. don’t look D. not look ‎ ‎　　14. Did you hear her _______ in the next room just now? ‎ ‎　　A. singing B. sing C. to sing D. sang ‎ ‎　　15. How long does it take you _______ your homework every evening? ‎ ‎　　 A. finish doing B. finishing to do C. to finish doing D. finish to do ‎ ‎　　16. Have you decided _______ ? ‎ ‎　　 A. to go with whom B. whom to go with C. whom go with D. with whom to go ‎ ‎　　17. Remember _______ the lights when you leave the office. ‎ ‎　　A. to turn off B. turning off C. turn offD. to turning off ‎ ‎　　18. Her hope _______ the 2008 Olympic Games. ‎ ‎　　 A. to take part inB. is to take part in C. taking part in D. will take part in ‎ ‎　　19. The room isn’t big enough _______ so many people. ‎ ‎　　 A. holding B. hold C. to hold D. holds ‎ ‎　　20. You’d better not spend more time _______ computer games. ‎ ‎　　 A. for playingB. in playing C. to play D. plays ‎ ‎　【参考答案】 1--5 BBBAC 　　6-10 DCADD 　　11-15 ACABC 　　16-20 BABCB 专题７ 动词应用讲解练习 一、知识讲解 做好动词填空题　紧扣时态是关键 ‎ ‎　“动词时态填空”主要包括动词的谓语形式和非谓语形式。动词的谓语形式涉及到时态和语态；非谓语形式涉及不定式、动名词和分词。要做好这类题目，除了必须熟记动词各种形式的基本概念和用法外，关键是要确定动词的时态。 ‎ 二、典型例题讲解 ‎（一）根据句子本身附带的时间状语和上下文确定时态，并注意人称和数的一致 ‎ ‎　　例１ My father is very busy. He often_________(come) late. ‎ ‎　点拨: 句中有频度副词often做状语，且前一句谓语动词是is，故用一般现在时，即comes。 ‎ ‎　　例２It_________(rain) at this time yesterday afternoon. ‎ ‎　　点拨: 句中的时间状语this time yesterday afternoon指过去某一时刻，故用过去进行时was raining。 ‎ ‎　　例３Li Mei_________(look) her pen now. ‎ ‎　　点拨: 由句中的状语now可以判断动词应用现在进行时，即is looking。 ‎ ‎　　例４ Mary_________(not hear) from Alice since last term. ‎ 点拨: 根据句中的时间状语since last term可知谓语动词需要用现在完成时，即hasn’‎ t heard。 ‎ ‎　　例５Our teacher’s son_________(be) ten years old next year. ‎ ‎　　点拨: 句中有时间状语next year，故用一般将来时will be。值得一提的是：shall / will与be going to在大多数情况下可以互换。但是在论及不能主观控制的事情时应用will，不能用be going to，所以本题只能填will be。 ‎ ‎（二）根据上下句确定事情发生的时间，据此判断时态 ‎ ‎　　例６Look! The boys_________(play) football over there. ‎ ‎　　点拨: 以第一句Look我们可以确定下句应该是“男孩子正在那边踢足球”，因而用现在进行时，即are playing。 ‎ ‎　　例7-When we _________（have）the class meeting? ‎ ‎　　-Tomorrow morning. ‎ ‎　　点拨: 根据答案可以确定用一般将来时，即用shall/ will have或are going to have。 ‎ ‎（三）根据时态呼应规则确定时态 ‎ ‎　　例8 She said she_________(finish) the work the next day. ‎ ‎　　点拨: 在宾语从句中，当主句的谓语动词是过去时，从句的谓语动词要用相应的过去时态。又根据从句的时间状语the next day可断定用过去将来时，即would finish。 ‎ ‎　　例9 When we reached Guangzhou, the ship_________already_________(set off). ‎ ‎　　点拨]: 在时间状语从句中，从句用过去时，主句常用过去完成时；另外还可以根据主从句谓语动词的先后来确定时态。所以本题的答案为had; set off。 ‎ ‎　　例10 We’ll go to Beijing zoo if it_________(not rain) tomorrow. ‎ ‎　　例11 I_________(write)to you as soon as I get to my home town. ‎ ‎　　点拨: 在if和as soon as引导的状语从句中，从句用一般现在时代替将来时，所以主句应该用一般将来时，反之亦然。故例10答案为doesn’t rain。例11为shall write。 ‎ ‎(四) 注意特殊情况 ‎ ‎　　根据时态呼应原则，从句中的谓语动词要受主句谓语动词的制约，即主句是过去时，从句也应用过去时。但表示客观事实或真理时，从句应该用一般现在时。 ‎ ‎　　例12 The teacher told us the sun _________(rise) in the east. ‎ ‎　　点拨: 主句虽然是一般过去时，但宾语从句说的是客观真理，所以不受主句的制约，应用一般现在时，即rises。 ‎ ‎(五) 根据固定搭配和惯用原则确定时态或非谓语动词形式 ‎ ‎　　例13 Sorry, I have kept you _________(wait) for a long time. ‎ ‎　　点拨: keep sb. doing sth.是固定搭配，意思为“使某人处于某种状态”。因此，用动词的现在分词waiting做宾语补足语。 ‎ ‎　　例14 The boss made him_________(work) fourteen hours a day. ‎ ‎　　点拨: 在let, make, have等使役动词所带的复合结构中，要用省略to的不定式做宾补，故用work原形。 ‎ ‎(六) 特殊动词特别注意 ‎ ‎　　1.只能用动名词做宾语的动词，如：enjoy, finish, mind等。 ‎ ‎　　2.只能用不定式做宾语的动词，如：hope， wish, mean, want, decide等。 ‎ ‎　　3.既可以用动名词又可以用不定式（形式由句意而定）做宾语的动词，如：begin, forget, remember, hate, love, like, need, start, stop等。 ‎ 三、链接中考 ‎（一）用所给动词的适当时态形式填空：‎ ‎1.We _______(go) swimming in the river every day in summer. ‎ ‎2.It ______(seem) you are right. ‎ ‎3.Look, the children ______ (play) basketball on the playground.‎ ‎4.He ______(listen) to the radio when I came in. ‎ ‎5.It is very cold. I think it ______. (rain)‎ ‎6.“I need some paper.” “I _____ (bring) some for you.”‎ ‎7.I can’t find my pen. Who ______(take) it? ‎ ‎8.He said that he _____(come)_ back in five minutes. ‎ ‎9.I didn’t meet him. He ______(leave) when I got there. ‎ ‎10.I ______(lose) my bike, so I have to walk to school. ‎ ‎11.He ______(sit) down and began to read his newspaper. ‎ ‎12.He is not here. He ______ (go) to the post office.‎ ‎13.He is very hungry. He ______(not eat) anything for three days. ‎ ‎14.I ______(go) with you if I have time. ‎ ‎15.We will go to the cinema if it ______ (rain) tomorrow.‎ ‎16.I will tell her the news when she ______(come) to see me next week. ‎ ‎17.“When ______ you ______(buy) the car?” “In 1998.” ‎ ‎18.We ______ (be)good friends since we met at school. ‎ ‎19.What ______ you ______ (do)at five yesterday afternoon? ‎ ‎20.The bike is nice. How much _____ it _____? (cost)‎ ‎21.It’s very important for us to learn English by_________(make) flashcards.‎ ‎22.We__________(take ) notes when the teacher had a lesson.‎ ‎23.I think_______(wear) tie looks really cool.‎ ‎24.It ____________ (seem) that they’re playing basketball on the playground.‎ ‎25.Students should be ___________ (allow) to study with friends.‎ ‎26.When they are together, they talk instead of __________ (do) homework.‎ ‎27.You’re only twelve years old. Don’t get your ears _____________ (pierce).‎ ‎28.It’s raining now. We have to put off ____________ (have) a picnic.‎ ‎29.It takes me half an hour __________ (walk) to work every day.‎ ‎30.If it __________ (be) fine, we’ll go fishing tomorrow.‎ ‎31.He ___________ (live) in Beijing since he was eight years old.‎ ‎32.I think the computer ____________ (invent) before the TV.‎ ‎33.He said he____________ (be) to the Great Wall four times.‎ ‎34.By the time I got home, my parents ____________ (have) supper.‎ ‎35.What’s your plan for the coming holiday? I ___________ (visit) Beijing if possible.‎ ‎36.The foreigners are getting used to____________ (use) the chopsticks.‎ ‎37.At first she had trouble __________ (make) compete sentences.‎ ‎38.I think _____________ (memorize) the words of pop songs also helps a little.‎ ‎39.Jim is often alone. He doesn’t seem ____________ (have) many friends.‎ ‎40.As a middle school student, you should stop __________ (wear) that silly earring.‎ ‎41.Cheng long _______________ (make) some great movies over the year.‎ ‎42.Why it is easier ____________ (learn) Chinese than English?‎ ‎43.My father used ____________ (get) up early.‎ ‎44.As the name ____________ (suggest) , he is a quiet boy.‎ ‎45.Be sure ___________ (close) the windows when you leave.‎ ‎46.If I ___________ (be) you, I would take a long walk before ________(go) to bed.‎ ‎47.You look tired. Why not _____________ (have) a short rest?‎ ‎48.My brother often practices _______________ (play) soccer after school.‎ ‎49.It’s too noisy. They must ____________ (listen) to the rock music now.‎ ‎50.I like singers who ___________ (be) really cool.‎ ‎51.Shanghai ________________ (become) a modern city over the years.‎ ‎52.He doesn’t know where ____________ (go) for the vacation.‎ ‎53.He decided ______________ (chat) with his friend on the net.‎ ‎54.I am considering ______________ (join) the English club next week.‎ ‎55.Sunglasses are used for ____________ (keep) out the sun.‎ ‎56.I _____________ (feed) my cat, so it is full now.‎ ‎57.Many tall buildings ________________ (build) in our city during the last few years.‎ ‎58.You shouldn’t make him______________ (stand) so long.‎ ‎59.My brother will call me as soon as he ______________ (reach) here.‎ ‎60.She said she _________________ (not write) to her parents for a long time.‎ ‎61.These homeless children _____________ (look) after in the SOS village.‎ ‎62.His uncle _______________ (return) in three days.‎ ‎63.So far, they_________________ (plant) thousands of trees.‎ ‎64.I’m sorry ___________ (keep) you __________ (wait) for me for such a long time.‎ ‎65.He was made ____________ (sing) a song for his little mistake.‎ ‎66.Just then I was frightened, I heard someone ___________ (walk) towards to me.‎ ‎67.The baby is sleeping. Would you mind ___________ (turn) off the radio?‎ ‎68.Do you enjoy __________ (listen) to the pop music?‎ ‎69.You had better not to go out now. It ___________ (rain) heavily.‎ ‎70.If I had a million dollars, I _____________ (give) it to the charity.‎ ‎71.Nancy said that loud music made her __________ (feel) sad.‎ ‎72.I __________ (oversleep) because my alarm clock didn’t go off.‎ ‎73.She told me she ____________ (go) on a beach vacation next month.‎ ‎74.Shanghai is cold this time of year. You need _____(pack) warm clothes if you ____(go) there.‎ ‎75.The man under the tree ___________ (call) Tom comes from India.‎ ‎76.What if everyone else ___________ (bring) a present to the party?‎ ‎77.We are looking forward to _________ (become) a volunteer.‎ ‎78.He likes _________ (drop) by his friends’ homes on weekends.‎ ‎79.In the United States, you’re not supposed ____________ (eat) with your hands.‎ ‎80.When I got to school, I realized I __________ (leave) my homework at school.‎ 参考答案 ‎1. goes 2. seems 3. are playing 4. was listening ‎5. is going to rain 6. will bring 7. has taken 8. would come ‎ ‎9. had left 10. have lost 11. sat 12. has gone ‎ ‎13. hasn’t eaten 14. will go 15. rains 16. comes ‎ ‎17. did, buy 18. have been 19. were, doing 20. did, cost 21making ‎ ‎22. were taking 23. wearing 24. seems 25. allowed 26. doing ‎ ‎27. pierced 28. having 29. to walk 30. is 31. has lived ‎ ‎32. was invented 33. had been 34. had had 35. will visit ‎ ‎36. using 37. making 38. memorizing 39. to have40. wearing41. has made 42. to learn 43. to get 44. suggests 45. to close 46. were. Going 47. have 48. playing 49. be listening 50. are 51. has become 52. to go 53.to chat 54. joining 55. keeping 56. have fed 57. have been built 58. stand 59. reaches 60. hadn’t written 61. are looked 62. will return 63. have planted 64. to keep ,waiting 65. to sing 66. walking 67. turning 68. listening 69. is raining70. would give 71. feel 72. overslept 73. would go 74. to pack , go 75. called 76. brings 77. becoming 78. dropping 79. to eat 80. had left ‎（一）根据短文，用所给动词的适当时态形式填空 ‎ ‎1. Leonardoda Vinci lived in Italy in the fifteen and sixteen centuries. He __1_____(be)a student in Florence, where he studied painting and design. He __2___(begin)a lot of paintings, but he___3_____(not finish)many of them. His picture of the Mona Lisa___4___(be)the most famous one in the world. Leonar was interested in many things. He ___5___(want )to know about everything he saw. He thought the sun___6____(not go)around the earth. He ____7____(write) music. He designed a flying machine 400 years the first one flew. Many people___8____(not understand) his ideas. It is difficult____9 ____(think) that one man ___10_____(can) do so much.‎ ‎1._______ 2 ______3 _______4_______5 _____6_____ 7 ____ _8 _______ 9 ______ 10 _____ ‎ ‎2. Tom walked into a shop. It was a sign outside : "Second-hand (旧的) clothes bought and 1______(sell) . "He 2______(carry) an old pair of trousers and asked the owner of the shop, "How much3______ you ______(give)me for these?" The man looked at them and then said: "Two dollars."‎ ‎　　"What!" said Tom. "I 4 ______(guess) they were worth at least five dollars."‎ ‎　　"No," said the man, "they 5______(not be) worth a cent more than two dollars."‎ ‎　　"Well," said Tom, 6 ______(take) two dollars out of his pocket. "Here's your money. These trousers 7______(hang) outside your shop. The list price (标价)of them was six dollars and a half. But I thought that was too much money, so I wanted 8 ______(find ) out how much they were really worth."‎ ‎　　Then he walked out of the shop with the pair of trousers and 9______(disappear) before the shop owner10 ______(think )of anything to say .‎ ‎1.______ 2 ______3 ______4______5 _______6______ 7 ______8 ______ 9 _____ 10 ________ ‎ ‎3 One night about nine o'clock. Dr. Eyck，a surgeon(外科医生)，had a phone call from Dr. Haydon at the hospital in Clans Falls. The surgeon 1______( ask) to go there at once 2______( operate )on a very sick boy who shot himself while playing with a gun.‎ ‎　　The doctor was soon on his way to Clans Falls. It was 60 miles away. And it 3______( snow) heavily in the sky. The surgeon thought he 4______ (get) there before 12 o'clock. A few minutes later，the doctor 5______( stop) by a man in an old black coat. Gun in hand，the man ordered the doctor 6______(get) out. Then the man drove the car down the road，7______(leave)the doctor in the falling snow.‎ ‎　　It was after two o'clock in the morning when the doctor arrived at the hospital in Clans Falls. Dr. Haydon told him that the boy 8______(die) an hour before. The two doctors walked by the door of the hospital waiting room. There9______( sit) the man in the old black coat with his head in his hands.‎ ‎　　“Mr. Cunningham,” said Dr. Haydon to the man，“this is Dr. Eyck. He is the surgeon who came all the way from Albany10______( save) your boy.”‎ ‎1.______ 2 ______3 _______4______5 ______6______ 7 ______8 ______ 9 ______ 10 _______ ‎ ‎4 My friend Matt and I arrived at the Activity Centre on Friday evening. The accommodation(招待设备) wasn't wonderful，but we had everything we needed (beds，blankets，food)，and we were pleased 1______( be )out of the city and in the fresh air.‎ ‎　　On Saturday morning we met the other ten members of our group. Cameron 2______(come )along with two friends，Kevin and Simon，while sisters Carole and Lynn had come with Amanda. There were some other members I 3_____(know). We had come from different places and none of us knew the area.‎ ‎　　We knew we 4______( spend) the weekend outdoors，but none of us 5_____(be)sure exactly how. Half of us spent the morning 6______(cave )while the others 7_____(go) rock-climbing and then we changed at lunchtime. Matt and I went to the caves(岩洞) first. Climbing out was harder than8______( go) in，but after a good deal of pushing， we were out at last. Though we 9______( cover) with mud，we were pleased and excited by what we10______(do) ‎ ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎5　 Hundreds of years ago，a Roman army came north from England1______( make )war on Scotland. The Scots，a brave people，2______(love)their country very much. They fought hard to drive the enemy out of Scotland，but there were too many Romans. It looked as if the Romans 3______( win.)‎ ‎　　One night，the leader of Scots marched his soldiers to the top of a hill. “We 4______( rest) here tonight，my men,”he said. “Tomorrow we 5______( fight )one more battle. We6______( win )or we will die.”‎ ‎　　They were all very tired，so they 7______(eat)their supper quickly and fell asleep. There were four guards on duty，but they，too，were very tired，and one by one，also fell asleep.‎ ‎　　The Romans were not asleep. Quickly they gathered at the foot of the hill. Slowly they climbed up the hillside，8______(take)care not to make a sound. Closer and closer they came to the sleeping Scots. They were almost at the top. A few minutes more，the war9______( be) over. Suddenly，one of them put his foot on a thistle(蓟). He cried out and his sudden cry 10______(wake) the Scots. In a moment，they were on their feet and ready for battle. The fighting was hard but it did not last long. The Scots wiped out the Romans and saved their country.‎ ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎6 One day Newtown 1______(be) a very clean place. Many years ago, however, there were millions of rats(老鼠) in Newtown. They 2______(attack) the cats and dogs. Sometimes a great number of them knocked down a man or woman 3______(walk) home at night. The rats were very large and they harmed many people.The Government (政府)ordered everybody 4______( kill) rats. Most people were very lazy, so they did not kill them. Then the Government promised 5_____( pay )some money for each dead rat. That 6_____(make) people very happy. A Government officer put all the dead rats in a big pile. Sometimes a man brought hundreds in a day. ‎ After two weeks there were not many rats in the city, but people still 7______(bring) rats to the Government officer. The Government officer thought that people8______(steal) dead rats from the pile. He ordered his men 9______(dig) a deep hole and 10______(put )the rats in it. Soon there were no more rats, and the Government did not pay any more money.‎ ‎1__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎7 Each morning a rich man found a poor man sitting on a bench(长凳). The poor man always sat there ,1_____(look) at the big hotel in which the rich man 2______(live). One day the rich man got out of the car and said to the poor man,”Excuse me ,but I just want 3_____( know )why you sit here and look at my hotel every morning.” “Sir,” said the poor man, “I am a failure .I have no money, no family, no home. I sleep on this bench, and every night I dream that one day I 4______( sleep) in that hotel.” The rich man said , “Tonight your dream will come true. I will pay for the best room in that hotel for you for a whole month.”‎ A few days later, the rich man went by the poor man’s room5______( ask )him how he 6______( enjoy)himself. To his surprise, he found that the man7______( move) out of the hotel, back to his park bench.When the rich man asked why,the poor man said, “You see, when I am down here8______( sleep) on my bench, I dream I am up there, in that big hotel. It’s a wonderful dream. But when I was up there, I 9______(dream) I was back to this cold bench. It’s a terrible dream, and I 10______( get )any sleep at all.”‎ ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎8 People1______(live)in different countries use different kinds of words.. Today there2______(be) about fifteen hundred languages in the world. Each contains(包含)many thousands of words, but we do not need3______(know)all of these. To read short stories,you need to know only about two thousand words. Before you leave school, you4______(learn) more than one thousand.‎ The words you know5______(call)your vocabulary. You should try 6______(write)in easy English for you 8______(read). You 9_____(enjoy) then. When you meet a new word,10______(find)it in your dictionary. Your dictionary is your most useful books.‎ ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎9 In England nobody under the age of eighteen1_____(allow) to drink in a bar. Everyone2______(know) it well. It 3______(be)Jack’s eighteenth birthday .Mr. Smith said to his usual bar for the first time. They drank for half an hour, and then Mr. Smith said to his son, “Now,Jack,5_____(listen) to me. You must always be careful6_____(not drink) too much”. “But how can I know I 7______(have) enough?” “Well, if you want to know it,I8_____(tell)you. Do you see those two lights at the corner of the bar? When you see four there, you have had enough and should9_____(go) home.” ‎ ‎ But Dad,”10_____(say) Jack, “I can only see one light there.‎ ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎ 10 Come on, boy. I believe in 1_____(you).If you are sure to win, you2______(succeed)”. Then mother and I practiced3______(talk) about many different topics. At last I4______(think) the topic “Believe in yourself.” I tried my best to5______(remember) all the speech and practice it over 100 words. When I felt tried and bored, my mother6______always______(encourage) me. With my mother’s great love, I did well in the contest. I could hardly believe my eyes when the ‎ news came that I7______(win) the place. I heard the cheers of the teachers and students. Those classmate who once looked down on me, now all said “Congratulations!” to me. My mother8______(hug) me and cried excitedly.‎ ‎ Since then, eveything9_______(change) for me. When I do anything, I try to tell everyone to be sure and I10______(find) myself.‎ ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎11 A graduation ceremony is a custom which1______(take) place when studets2______(graduate) from a school. The ceremony3_______(hold) in a big hall. During the ceremony, it is common for the best students, the principal and other pfficals4______(call) a diploma will6______(offer). It shows that the student7______(complete) a course. After the ceremony, students often8______(chat) with their teachers and relatives who come9______(congratulate) them. The exciting graduation ceremony10______(mark) the end of a period in a student’s school life.‎ ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎12 China1___ (join) the WTO on December11,2001. The Chinese hoped2______(be)a member of the WTO many years ago.Now the hope3______(come) true. China is both the largest and the fastest4_____(grow) country in the5______(develop) world. After6______(enter) the WTO, she will be much richer, so will the world. However, the Chinese7_____(meet) more difficulties and challenges. As Chinese students, we should8______(work) hard at our subjects, especially English.English is the most widely9______(use) in the world.It’s a bridge to much knowledge. So,it’s more important10______(learn)English well that before. ‎ ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎13 Why is TianYuan so full of surprises? At 16, she 1______(sing) with the band Hopscotch(跳房子). And all the songs on an English album in 2002_2_____(write) by herself. So far she3______(play) several characters in movies, including a flight attendant.‎ ‎ Teem talked to her find out why she is so spcial. “When I was in junior school,” my uncle used 4______(bring) some foreign CD. I fell in love with them.” She said “ English has opened up a new world for me. I find an amazingly different way of living and5______(think) behind it. English gives me something others6______(not have).”‎ Although tired and busy, she enjoys7______(live) such a life, because if she gives up, she8______(lose) some opportunities. She hasn’t planned what9______(do) in the future. She said she10______(follow)) her life at present.‎ ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎14 Both Mr Green an his wife1______(live) in a cave. Neither he nor his wife2_____(like) childern. Both of them 3______(eat) their meals together. Either Mrs Green or her maid 4______(cook) the evening meals. Both breakfast and lunch5______(be ) prepared by Mrs Black, the cook. .Neither Mr Green nor the ladies in the cave6______(find) Mrs Blacks cooking good. Either Mrs Black or one of her maids7______(buy) the vegetables and meat from the market. They are a stranger couple who dislike company. Neither the telephones nor the doorbell 8______(work). Both of them9______(dislike) visitors. Neither the maids nor the cook10______(talk) to Mr Green. Both Mr Green and his wife spend much of their day reading.‎ ‎ They both enjoy reading.‎ ‎ 注: maid 女佣 女仆 couple 夫妇 company 陪同 ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎15 My aunt is an engineer in America. She 1______(work) in Company of Microsoft since 1998. Last month she came back to China. We were happy2______(see) her on May Day. After3______(finish) lunch, we showed her around our hometown. “ This hotel4______(build) last year. Look, another onew id being built over there.”‎ ‎ “What a great change!” my aunt said.‎ ‎ “We5______(plant) more trees and flowers in our town soon. And we’ll do something to stop the factories6______(pour) the waste water into the river,”I told her.‎ ‎ Aunt was very pleased with what she saw. When we asked her7_______(stay) longer, she answered, “No, I can’t. I must fly to Beijing tommorrow. Though I I have an important lecture to give. If I 8______(have) time, I’ll certainly come back again. live in America, I’ll always be Chinese. I 9______(do ) something for our hometown. Let’s 10______(make) a contribution to building our country together.”‎ ‎1.__________ 2 ____________3 _____________4____________5 ___________‎ ‎6___________ 7 ___________8 _____________ 9 ___________ 10 __________ ‎ ‎ Keys ‎1）1 was 2 began 3 didn’t finish 4 is 5 wanted 6 doesn’t go 7 wrote 8 didn’t understaqnd 9 to thing 10can ‎ ‎2） 1 sold 2 was carrying 3 will give 4 had guessed 5 aren’t 6 taking 7 were hanging 8 to find 9 disappeared 10 could think ‎3）1 was asked 2 to operate 3 was snowing 4 could get 5 was stopped 6 to get7 leaving 8 had died 9 sat 10 to save ‎4）1 to be 2 had come 3 didn't know. 4 were going to spend/will spend 5 was 6 caving 7 went 8 going 9were covered 10 had done ‎5）1 to make 2 loved 3 would win. 4 will rest 5 will fight 6 must win 7 ate8 taking 9 would be 10 woke ‎6）1 is 2 attacked 3 walking 4 to kill 5 to pay 6 made 7 brought 8were stealing 9 to dig 10 put ‎7）1 looking 2 lived 3 to know 4 will sleep 5 to ask 6 was enjoyed 7had moved 8 sleeping 9 dreamed10 couldn’t get ‎8）1 living 2 are 3 to know 4 will learn 5 are called 6 to make 7 written 8 to read 9 will enjoy 10 find ‎9）1 is allowed 2 knows 3 was 4 took 5 listen 6not to drink 7 have had 8 will tell 9 go 10 said ‎10）1 yourself 2will succeed 3 talking 4 thought 5 to remember 6 was encouraging 7 had won 8 hugged 9 has changed 10 will find ‎11）1 will take 2 graduate3 is held 4 to give 5 called 6 be offered 7 has completed 8 chat 9 to congratulate 10 marks ‎12）1 joined 2 to be 3 has come 4 growing 5 developing 6 entering 7 will meet 8 work 9 use 10 to lean ‎13）1 sang 2 were written 3 has played 4 to bring 5 thinking 6 don’t have 7 living 8 will lose 9 to do 10 could follow ‎14）1 live 2 likes 3 eat 4 cook 5 are 6 find 7 buys 8 works 9 dislike 10 talks ‎ ‎15）1 has worked 2 to see 3 finishing 4 was built 5 will plant 6 pouring 7 to stay 8 have 9 will do 10 make 专题８ 中考英语重点词汇归纳 一. 出现以下词,用do填空: ‎ can , could, may, must, need, had better, why not, make, have to, let's, see, hear, watch, notice, Will ( Would ) you please…, help do, help sb do.‎ 二. 出现以下词,用to do 填空: ‎ would like, want, begin, start, hope, decide, ask, wish, have something to do, tell, take time, it's time, remember, forget, learn, teach, try, stop, plan, adj./疑问词后,take ,allow sb to do, It's +形容词+to do something, know, refuse, invite , get order, like, offer, lend, make up one's mind to do, set one's mind to do, enough, need ,help to do,help sb to do,‎ 三. 出现以下词,用doing 填空: ‎ allow doing,finish, like, enjoy, mind, keep, be busy, there be, do some…, go doing, prevent, be worth, spend, practice, feel like, thank somebody for doing something ,stop, excuse somebody for doing something, can't help, prefer… to…,look forward to…hate, mention, have fun doing,介词:at, in, on, of, from, for, about, with, without, ,make a contribution to, be used to, hear, see, watch, notice, listen, can't help doing 四. 基数词的特殊变化 ‎ one---first ; two---second; three---third; five---fifth; eight---eighth; ‎ nine---ninth; twelve---twelfth; twenty---twentieth; twenty-one---twenty-first ‎ 五. 代词的变化: ‎ 主格 宾格 所有格(adj.) 所有格(n.) 反身代词 ‎ I me my mine myself you you your yours yourself ‎ he him his his himself she her her hers herself ‎ it it its its itself we us our ours ourselves ‎ you you your yours yourselves they them their theirs themselves ‎ 六. 表示天气的词 ‎ ‎1. sun—sunny 2. cloud—cloudy 3. rain—rainy 4. wind—windy 5. fog—foggy 6. mist—misty ‎ ‎7. snow—snowy 8. shower—showery ‎ 七. 表示方向的词 ‎ ‎1. east—eastern—easterner(s) 2. south—southern—southerner(s)‎ ‎3. west—western—westerner(s) 4. north—northern—northerner(s) ‎ 八. 国家---国家的(人) ‎ ‎1. China—Chinese 2. Japan—Japanese 3. Germany--German 4. Canada—Canadian ‎ ‎5. Sweden—Swedish 6. Australia--stralian 7. Italy—Italian 8. India—Indian ‎ ‎9. France—French-renchman 10. merica—American ‎ 九. 一些特殊的名词复数及短语 ‎ ‎1. leaf__________________ 2. life__________________ 3. thief_________________ ‎ ‎4. knife_________________ 5. shelf_________________ 6. half__________________ ‎ ‎7. roof__________________ 8. German_______________ 9. sheep_________________ ‎ ‎10. deer_________________ 11. child________________ 12. woman teacher________ ‎ ‎13. tooth________________ 14. foot_________________ 15. people_______________ ‎ ‎16. postman______________ 19. boy__________________ 20. key__________________ ‎ ‎21. story________________ 22. family_______________ 23. century______________‎ ‎24. baby_________________ 26. tomato_______________ 27. potato_______________ ‎ ‎28. radio________________ 29. zoo__________________ 30. kilo_________________‎ ‎31. photo________________ 32. businessman__________ 33. woman________________ ‎ ‎34. man__________________ 35. difficulty___________ 36. monkey_______________‎ ‎37. mouse________________ ‎ 十. 不规则形容词和副词的比较级及最高级: ‎ ‎1. good—better—best 2. well—better—best 3. much—more—most 4. many—more—most ‎ ‎5. bad—worse—worst 6. badly—worse—worst 7. ill—worse—worst 8. far—farther—farthest ‎ ‎9. old—older—oldest 10. old—elder—eldest 11. little—less—least 专题９句子种类 一. 陈述句的构成形式及基本用法 ‎1. 陈述句：是用来陈述一个事实或表达说话人看法（包括肯定和否定）的句子。通常用降调，句末用句号“.”。　　Tom has a new car. 　　The flower isn’t beautiful. ‎ ‎2. 陈述句否定式的构成 ‎　　(1) 如果肯定陈述句的谓语部分含有助动词、情态动词或连系动词be，则只需在这些动词后加not即可构成否定式。‎ ‎ He is playing the guitar.（肯定）He is not playing the guitar.（否定）‎ ‎ We can get there before dark.（肯定）We can’t get thee before dark.（否定）‎ ‎　　(2) 如果陈述句的谓语动词是实义动词，而其中又没有情态动词或助动词时，则需根据人称和时态在该实义动词前加don’t, doesn’t或didn’t。同时把该实义动词变为原形。‎ He plays the violin well.（肯定） He doesn’t play the violin well.（否定）‎ She won the game.（肯定） She didn’t win the game.（否定）‎ ‎(3) 如果句子是there be结构或谓语动词是have（有），除了be和have之后加not之外，句中如果有some要变为any。例如：‎ There is some water in the cup. →There is not any water in the cup.‎ He has some books. →He has not any books.‎ ‎(4) 除not以外，否定词no, never, nothing, nobody, few等也可构成否定句。例如There is something wrong with his bike. →There is nothing wrong with his bike.‎ I have seen the film. →I have never seen the film.‎ 二. 祈使句的构成形式及基本用法 祈使句是用来表示命令、请求、建议、号召等的句子，谓语动词用原形，句末用感叹号“！”或句号“.”。朗读时一般用降调。‎ ‎1. 肯定的祈使句：‎ ‎（1）祈使句主语是you时，you常省略，但如果要特别强调对方或表达某种强烈的情绪时可以有主语或称呼语。Be quiet. You be quiet!‎ ‎（2）“Do+祈使句”表示一种强烈的感情或请求，do起强调作用。‎ Do come back at once! Do be careful.‎ ‎（3）please用在祈使句中可以表示一种客气的语气，但please用在句末时，必须用逗号与其余部分分开。 Open the window, please.‎ ‎（4）Let引导祈使句时，后面需跟上人称代词或称呼语，人称代词一般只用第一、第三人称。 Let Jack wait a minute. Let’s go to school.‎ ‎（5）在祈使句中，Let’s和 Let us是有区别的。Let’s包括说话者，而Let us不包括听话者在内。这点从反意疑问句时可明显看出。‎ Let’s go skating, shall we?（表示内部的建议）‎ Let us try again, will you?（表示向别人发出请求）‎ ‎ 2. 否定祈使句通常以Don’t或Never开头。其结构通常是：“Don’t(Never)+动词原形+其他成分” 例如：Don’t do that again! Never leave today’s work for tomorrow!‎ Don’t be late next time!‎ 三. 一般疑问句、特殊疑问句、选择疑问句、反意疑问句的构成形式及基本用法 ‎1. 一般疑问句：‎ ‎ （1）一般疑问句的肯定形式 一般疑问句一般是指以助动词、情态动词、be动词或have（有）开始，通常要求以yes，或no来回答的疑问句，一般疑问句读时通常用升调。Do you know Mr. Smith? Can you swim? ‎ ‎ （2）一般疑问句的否定结构 ‎ ① 在一般疑问句的否定结构中，把副词not放在一般疑问句的主语之后。但如果用not的简略形式-n’t，则须将-n’t与一般疑问句句首的be, have，助动词或情态动词写在一起。在实际运用中，一般都采用简略式。 Are you not a football fan? Aren’t you a football fan?‎ Will she not like it? Won’t she like it?‎ ‎ ② 与汉语不同的是，英语一般疑问句否定结构的答语是否定还是肯定，全由答语的否定或肯定来决定。若答语是肯定的，则用yes加肯定结构；若答语是否定的，则用no加否定结构。 Aren’t you a football fan? 你不是足球迷吗？Yes, I am.No, I am not.‎ ‎ Won’t she like it? Yes, she will. No, she won’t. ‎ ‎2. 特殊疑问句 特殊疑问句由“疑问代词或疑问副词+一般疑问句”构成，句子一般用倒装语序，但如果主语是疑问代词或由疑问代词修饰时，用陈述句的语序。特殊疑问句不能用yes或no回答，读时用降调。例如：Who is on duty today? How long have you been in Beijing?‎ What time do you get up every morning? What must I do now?‎ 常用的特殊疑问句 职业，身份 What is your father? He is a doctor. ‎ 姓名或关系 Who is that boy? He is Jack.He is my brother ‎ 相貌特征 what…like? What is she like? What does she look like? She is beautiful. ‎ 目的 what…for? What did they come here for? To attend a meeting. ‎ 原因 Why did they come here? Because they have a meeting to attend. ‎ 天气 what…like? How is the weather today?What is the weather like today? It’s fine. ‎ 颜色 What color is her skirt? It’s red. ‎ 服装尺寸 What size does he wear? He wars 40. ‎ 几点钟 What time is it? It’s 7:30. ‎ 星期几 What day is today? It’s Tuesday. ‎ 几号，日期 What is the date today? It’s May 2. ‎ 年龄（多大） How old is he? He is 38. ‎ 持续多长时间（多久） How long have you been here? For five months. ‎ 长度（多长） How long is the bridge? It’s 500 metres. ‎ 距离（多远） How far is it from here to the zoo? It’s 6 kilometres. ‎ 频度（多经常） How often do you come back? Once a week. ‎ 时间经过（多快） How soon will she arrive? In a week. ‎ 数量（多少） how many（可数名词）how much（不可数名词） ‎ How many jackets do you have? Three. How much coffee do you want? Two cups. ‎ 价格 How much is it?How much does it cost? Five dollars. ‎ 高度（多高） how tall（人，树）how high（山，建筑物） ‎ ‎ How tall is she? She’s 1.73 metres. How high is the tower? It’s 450 metres. ‎ ‎ 3. 选择疑问句：‎ ‎ 选择疑问句是说话者提出两种或两种以上的不同情况，让对方选择回答的疑问句。其结构是“疑问句+选择部分”。选择部分由or连接，or前面的部分读升调，or后面的部分读降调。‎ ‎ 选择疑问句不能用yes或no回答，而必须具体的选择答复。Is your bag yellow or black? It’s black.。 Would you like some tea or coffee? Either will do.。 Which do you like better, singing or dancing? I like dancing better.‎ ‎4. 反意疑问句：‎ ‎ 反意疑问句是指在陈述句之后附加一个意思与之相反的简短问句，问对方是否赞同的疑问句。附加问句的否定式必须缩写。‎ ‎（1）肯定的陈述句后跟否定的附加问句，否定的陈述句后跟肯定的附加问句。‎ ‎ I am your teacher, aren’t I? He didn’t study hard, did he?‎ ‎（2）如果陈述句中含有否定副词never（从不，决不），hardly（几乎不）或其他表示否定代词或形容词，如nothing, none no one, nobody, neither, few, little等，则附加问句只能用肯定式。如：They hardly write to each other, do they? He has found nothing, has he?‎ Few people knew the secret, did they? ‎ ‎（3）当反意疑问句是“否定陈述句+肯定附加问句”时，英语与汉语的回答习惯存在差异。英语回答时只看实际情况，若答语的具体内容是肯定的就用“Yes+肯定结构”，答语的具体内容是否定的就用“No+否定结构”，而译成汉语时，则必须把yes译“不是”，把no译成“是的”。‎ ‎ ---You won’t be away for long, will you? 你不会离开太久，是吗？‎ ‎　　 ---Yes, I will.不，我会离开很久。 ---No, I won’t.是的，我不会离开很久。‎ ‎　　 ---I don’t think she’ll come by bike, will she? 我认为她不会骑自行车，会吗？‎ ‎　　 ---Yes, she will.不，她会骑自行车来。 ---No, she won’t.是的，她不会骑自行车来。‎ 四. 由what, how引导的感叹句的构成形式、用法及区别 ‎　　感叹句是表示喜、怒、哀、乐以及惊异等感情的句子。句末用感叹号“！”，读时用降调，感叹句往往由what或how引导，what修饰名词，how修饰形容词，副词或动词。‎ ‎1. what引导的感叹句：‎ ‎　（1）what + a/an +形容词+单数可数名词+陈述句（主语+谓语）‎ ‎　　　What a beautiful city it is!　　　What an interesting story she told! ‎ ‎　（2）what+形容词+复数可数名词/不可数名词+陈述句（主语+谓语）‎ ‎　　　What expensive watches they are! 　　　What terrible weather it is! ‎ ‎2．How引导的感叹句：‎ ‎　（1）How+形容词/副词+陈述句（主语+谓语）‎ ‎　　　How cold it is! 　 How hard he works! ‎ ‎　（2）How+陈述句（主语+谓语）‎ ‎　　　How he loves his son!　　　How I miss you!‎ ‎　（3）How+形容词+a/an+单数可数名词+陈述句（主语+谓语）‎ ‎　　　How tall a tree it is! ‎ ‎（4）上述两种感叹句可以互相转换。例如：What a clever boy he is!→How clever the boy is!‎ What a cold day it is!→How cold it is!‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎ 1. ---Excuse me, _______ is the nearest bookshop?‎ ‎ ---Go down the street and turn left at the second corner.‎ ‎ A. how B. what C. where D. who ‎ 2. ---______ is it from our school to the Bell Tower?‎ ‎ ---About half an hour’s bus ride. Shall we go and visit it?‎ ‎ A. How long B. How often C. How far D. How much ‎ 3. ---Linda had nothing for breakfast this morning, _______? ---No. She got up too late.‎ ‎ A. had she B. hadn’t she C. did she D. didn’t she ‎ 4. ---The room is so dirty. ______ we clean it? ---Of course.‎ ‎ A. Will B. Would C. Do D. Shall ‎ 5. ---__________, sir? ---Size 41, I think ‎ A. What size do you need B. What can I do for you ‎ C. How do you like this shirt D. What’s the matter with you ‎ 6. ---_______ good weather! Why not go out for a walk?‎ ‎ A. What B. How C. What a D. How a ‎ 7. ---It’s a nice car. ______ have you been in it? ---Just to Shanghai.‎ ‎ A. How much B. How long C. How soon D. How far ‎ 8. ---_______ to the United States? ---No, never, but I went to Canada a few years ago.‎ ‎ A. Have you been B. Have you gone C. Did you go D. Will you go ‎ 9. ---_______ were you away from school last year? ---About two weeks.‎ ‎ A. How often B. How soon C. How long D. When ‎ 10. ---______ do you want? ---I want a CD of popular songs.‎ ‎ A. Which CD B. How many CDs C. What CD D. How much ‎ 11. _______ is your mother, a teacher or a doctor?‎ ‎ A. What B. Which C. Who D. whose ‎ 12. ---______ is your mother today, Jim? ---She is much better.‎ ‎ A. How B. What C. Where D. How old ‎ 13. ---______he ______ at this school last term? ---Yes, I think so.‎ ‎ A. Did…study B. Does…study C. Was…study D. Did…studied ‎ 14. ---_______ did you begin to learn English? ---Three years ago.‎ ‎ A. When B. Why C. Where D. What ‎ 15. ---________ do you write to your pen-friend? ---Once a week.‎ ‎ A. How long B. How soon C. How far D. How often ‎ 16. _______ nice flowers! Where did you pick them?‎ ‎ A. How B. What C. What a D. How a ‎ 17. The sick man’s allowed to take a walk in the garden every day, _______?‎ ‎ A. is he B. isn’t he C. has he D. hasn’t he ‎ 18. ______ cross the road before the traffic lights turn green.‎ ‎ A. Not B. Won’t C. Don’t D. Doesn’t ‎ 19. He found nothing in the room, _________?‎ ‎ A. doesn’t he B. does he C. didn’t he D. did he ‎ 20. You haven’t changed your mind, ________?‎ ‎ A. do you B. are you C. have you D. did you ‎ 二. 句型转换（按要求改写下列句子）‎ ‎1. Bruce bought a dictionary yesterday. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ Bruce ________ ________ a dictionary yesterday.‎ ‎2. Mr. Smith does morning exercises every day. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ________ Mr. Smith ______ morning exercises every day?‎ ‎3. Allan will go back to England by plane next month. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ________ _______ Allan go back to England next month?‎ ‎4. There are some apples on the table. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ There _______ _______ apples on the table.‎ ‎5. When she sees you, she will tell you the news(就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ ______ she tell you the news?‎ ‎6. Uncle Wang likes making things. (改写为否定句)‎ ‎ Uncle Wang _______ _______ making things.‎ ‎7. Ann returned the book to the library yesterday. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ________ Ann _______ the book to the library yesterday?‎ ‎8. Our city is very beautiful. (改为感叹句) _______ _______ our city is!‎ ‎9. He has worked in this school for five years. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ _______ has he worked in this school?‎ ‎10. Both of them are my best friends. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ _______ of them _______ my best friend.‎ ‎11. They are happy to see each other. (改为感叹句)‎ ‎ _______ ______ they are to see each other!‎ ‎12. The exam begins at nine. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ________ the exam _______ at nine?‎ ‎13. He was playing basketball at four yesterday afternoon. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ ______ he ______ at four yesterday afternoon?‎ ‎14. He had nothing for breakfast. (改为反意疑问句)‎ ‎ He had nothing for breakfast ______ _______?‎ ‎15. She doesn’t think I can surf on the Internet. (改反意疑问句)‎ ‎ She doesn’t think I can surf on the Internet, _______ _______?‎ ‎16. He’s put the tree in the hole? (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ______ he ______ the tree in the hole?‎ ‎17. How useful the book is! (改为陈述句) It is ______ ______ useful book.‎ ‎18. The population of Australia is about 19,500,000. (就划线部分提问) ‎ ‎_______ ______ population of Australia?‎ ‎19. The meeting will start in ten minutes. (就划线部分提问) ‎ ‎_______ ______ will the meeting start?‎ ‎20. Don’t tell him to come to my office. (改为肯定的祈使句) ______ ______ to come to my office.‎ 三. 句子翻译:根据所给汉语完成英语句子，每空一词。 ‎1. 我母亲通常在星期日打扫卫生，洗衣服。My mother usually _________ some cleaning and ‎ __________ on Sundays.2. 在今晚的聚会上我们肯定会玩得痛快。We’re __________ to have __________ at the party this evening.3. 你看明天有可能结束这项工作吗?Do you think _________ ________to finish the work tomorrow?4. 你怎样与你的邻居相处好?________can you get on well ________ your neighbours?5. 西安的新变化使参观者们感到惊奇。The _________ are __________ at the new changes in Xi’an.6. 天冷了，请穿上暖和的衣服。It’s cold. Please _______ _______ warm clothes.7. 爱迪生在小时候就对科学感兴Edison _______ _______ _______ science even when he was a small boy.8. 尽管他失败了很多次，但他没有灰心。Even though he had failed many times, he didn’t _______ ________.9. 无论发生什么事情，我都会和你在一起。___________happens, I’ll be with you.10.楼上的噪音害得我整晚无法入睡。The noises upstairs made me not able to _______ _______all night. ‎ 【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.C 2.C 3.C 4.D 5.A 6.A 7.D 8.A 9.C 10.C 11.A 12.A 13.A 14.A 15.D 16.B 17.B 18.C 19.D 20.C 二. 1. didn’t buy 2.Does; do 3.How will 4.aren’t any 5.When will 6.doesn’t like 7.Did; return 8.How beautiful 9.How long 10.Neither; is 11.How happy 12.Does; begin 13.What was; doing 14.did he 15. does she 16.Has; put 17.such a 18.What’s the 19.How soon 29.Tell him 三. 1. does; washing 2. sure; fun 3. it/ it’s possible 4. How; with 5. visitors; amazed/ surprised 6.put on 7. was interested in 8. lose heart 9. Whatever 10. fall asleep 专题10 八种时态归纳复习 一、一般现在时： ‎ 概念：经常、反复发生的动作或行为及现在的某种状况。 ‎ 时间状语：often，usually，always，sometimes，every week（day，year，month．．．），once a week，on Sundays，etc． ‎ 基本结构：①be动词；②行为动词 ‎ 否定形式：① am ／is ／are ＋not；②此时态的谓语动词若为行为动词，则在其前加don't，如主语为第三人称单数，则用doesn't，同时还原行为动词。 ‎ 一般疑问句：①把be动词放于句首；②用助动词 do提问，如主语为第三人称单数，则用does，同时，还原行为动词。 ‎ 二、一般过去时： ‎ 概念：过去某个时间里发生的动作或状态；过去习惯性、经常性的动作、行为。 ‎ 时间状语：ago，yesterday，the day before yesterday，last week（year，night，month．．．），in 1989，just now，at the age of 5，one day，long long ago，once upon a time，etc． ‎ 基本结构：①be动词；②行为动词 ‎ 否定形式：① was／were ＋not；②在行为动词前加didn't，同时还原行为动词。 ‎ 一般疑问句：①was或were放在句首；②用助动词do的过去式did提问，同时还原行为动词。 ‎ 三、现在进行时： ‎ 概念：表示现阶段或说话时正在进行的动作及行为。 ‎ 时间状语：now，at this time，these days，etc． ‎ 基本结构：am／is／are ＋doing ‎ 否定形式：am／is／are ＋not＋doing ‎ 一般疑问句：把be动词放在句首 ‎ 四、过去进行时： ‎ 概念：表示过去某段时间或某一时刻正在发生或进行的行为或动作。 ‎ 时间状语：at this time yesterday，at that time或以when引导的谓语动词是一般过去时的时间状语等。 ‎ 基本结构：was／were ＋doing ‎ 否定形式：was／were ＋not＋doing ‎ 一般疑问句：把was或were放在句首 ‎ 五、现在完成时： ‎ 概念：过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果，或从过去已经开始，持续到现在的动作或状态。 ‎ 时间状语：recently，lately，since．．．(过去时间和过去句子)since 5 years ago ，for．．．(for 5 years)，in the last/past few years，etc． ‎ 基本结构：have／has ＋done ‎ 否定形式：have／has ＋not＋done ‎ 一般疑问句：have／has放于句首 ‎ 六、过去完成时： ‎ 概念：以过去某一时间为标准，在此以前发生的动作或行为，或在过去某动作之前完成的行为，即“过去的过去”。 ‎ 时间状语：before，by the end of last year（term，month．．．），etc． ‎ 基本结构：had ＋done ‎ 否定形式：had ＋not＋done ‎ 一般疑问句：had放于句首 ‎ 七、一般将来时： ‎ 概念：表示将要发生的动作或存在的状态及打算、计划或准备做某事。 ‎ 时间状语：tomorrow，next day（week，month，year．．．．），soon，in a few minutes，by．．．，the day after tomorrow，etc． ‎ 基本结构：①am／is／are／going to ＋do；②will／shall＋do ‎ 否定形式：①am／is／are ＋not＋going to ＋do；② will／shall＋not＋do ‎ 一般疑问句：①be放于句首；② will／shall提到句首 ‎ 八、过去将来时： ‎ 概念：立足于过去某一时刻，从过去看将来，常用于宾语从句中。 ‎ 时间状语：the next day（morning，year．．．），the following month（week．．．），etc． ‎ 基本结构：①was／were／going to ＋do；② would／should ＋do ‎ 否定形式：①was／were／not＋going to ＋do；②would／should ＋not＋do ‎ 一般疑问句：①was或were放于句首；②would／should提到句首 专题11 宾语从句 ‎【考点扫描】‎ 中考对宾语从句的考查主要集中在以下几个方面：‎ ‎1. 引导宾语从句的连词和代词选择；‎ ‎2. 宾语从句的语序；‎ ‎3. 宾语从句的时态。‎ 考查的主要形式是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。阅读理解和书面表达肯定也要用到宾语从句。‎ ‎【名师精讲】‎ 一. 宾语从句的种类 宾语从句是一种名词性从句，在句中作及物动词的宾语，或介词的宾语，或 形容词的宾语。根据引导宾语从句的不同连词，宾语从句可分为三类。‎ ‎1. 由that引导的宾语从句。That只有语法作用，没有实在的意义，在口语 非正式文体中可以省略。例如：He said (that) he wanted to stay at home.‎ She doesn’t know (that) she is seriously ill. I am sure (that) he will succeed.‎ ‎2. 由连接代词who, whom, whose, what, which和连接副词when, where, why, how引导的宾语从句。这些连接代词和连接副词在宾语从句中充当某个成分。例如：Do you know who (whom) they are waiting foe? He asked whose handwriting was the best. Can you tell me where the No.3 bus stop is? I don’t know why the train is late.‎ ‎3. 由if或whether引导的宾语从句。If和whether在句中的意思是“是否”。例如：‎ I want to know if (whether) he lives there.‎ He asked me whether (if) I could help him.‎ 二. 宾语从句的语序 宾语从句的语序应为陈述句的语序。例如：I hear (that) physics isn’t easy.‎ I think (that) you will like this school soon. Can you tell me how I can get to zoo?‎ Please tell me when we’ll have the meeting.‎ 三. 宾语从句的时态 ‎1. 如果主句的时态是一般现在时，宾语从句该用什麽时态就用什麽时态。如：‎ I don’t think (that) you are right. Please tell us where he is.‎ Can you tell me how I can get to the railway station?‎ ‎2. 如果主句的时态是一般过去时，宾语从句只能用相应的过去时态（一般过去时， 过去进行时， 过去将来时，过去完成时）。例如：He asked what time it was.‎ He told me that he was preparing for the sports meet. He asked if you had written to Peter. ‎ He said that he would go back to the U.S. soon.‎ ‎3. 如果宾语从句所陈述的是客观真理，其时态常用一般现在时。例如：Our teacher said that January is the first month of the year.‎ Scientists have proved that the earth turns around the sun.‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎1. (北京市中考试题) Miss Green didn’t tell us _______ in 2002.‎ ‎ A. where does she live B. Where she lives ‎ C. where did she live D. where she lived ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是宾语从句的语序和时态。宾语从句应用陈述句的语序和时态，所以应选D。‎ ‎2. (上海市徐汇区中考试题) Would you please tell me ________?‎ ‎ A. when did he come home B. where he would play football ‎ C. if he had seen the film D. why he didn’t watch the game ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是宾语从句的语序和时态。主句用的实际上是现在时，宾语从句在这个句子里应用陈述句的语序和一般过去时。‎ ‎3. (哈尔滨市中考试题) I don’t know when __________.‎ ‎ A. will the train leave B. the train will leave ‎ C. would the train leave D. the train leave ‎【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是宾语从句的语序和时态。只有B在语序和时态上符合要求。‎ ‎4. (常州市中考试题) ---We don’t know _______. ‎ ‎---It is said that he was born in Sweden.‎ ‎ A. what he is B. if he lives here ‎ C. where he comes from D. which country is he from ‎ 【解析】答案: C。该题考查的是宾语从句的语序。按照他们谈论的话题可知：他们说的是某人是哪里人。A和B可以排除掉。D的语序不对，只有C正确。‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1. Do you know _______ during the coming summer holiday?‎ ‎ A. what will Tom do B. what did Tom do C. what Tom will do D. what Tom did ‎2. I want to know_________.‎ ‎ A. what is his name B. what’s his name C. that his name is D. what his name is ‎3. Do you know ________ I could pass the exam?‎ ‎ A. that B. whether C. what D. which ‎4. Jim doesn’t understand ____________.‎ ‎ A. which is the way to the museum B. why his wife always goes shopping ‎ C. what is the way to the museum D. why does she always go shopping ‎5. ---Could you tell me ______ she is looking for?‎ ‎ A. that B. whose C. who D. which ‎6. Mr. King didn’t know _______ yesterday evening.‎ ‎ A. when does his son come home B. when his son comes home ‎ C. when did his son come home D. when his son came home ‎7. Could you tell me _______ the bike this morning?‎ ‎ A. how does he mend B. how he mends C. how he mended D. how did he mend ‎8. ---I’m waiting for the mail. Do you know ________ it will arrive?‎ ‎ ---Usually it comes by 4: 00.‎ ‎ A. how B. where C. when D. what ‎9. ---Excuse me, would you please tell me ________?‎ ‎ ---Certainly. Go straight along here. It’s next to a hospital.‎ ‎ A. how we can get to the post office B. how can we get to the post office ‎ C. how get to the post office D. how could we get to the post office ‎10. ---Can I help you?‎ ‎ ---Yes. I’d like a ticket to Mount Emei. Can you tell me ______ take to get there?‎ ‎ A. how soon will it B. how soon it will C. how long it will D. how long will it ‎11. He wanted to know ___________.‎ ‎ A. whether he speaks at the meeting B. when the meeting would start ‎ C. what he’s going to do at the meeting D. where would the meeting be held ‎ ‎12. ---Could you tell me _________ the Bamboo Garden? ---The day after tomorrow, I think.‎ ‎ A. when will you visit B. when you will visit ‎ C. when would you visit D. when you would visit ‎13. Would you please tell me _________ next, Mr Wang?‎ ‎ A. what should we do B. we should do what ‎ C. what we should do D. should we do what ‎14. You can’t imagine _________ when they received these nice Christmas presents.‎ ‎ A. how they were excited B. how excited they were ‎ C. how excited were they D. they were how excited ‎15. I want to know ________ you will come back at 8:00 tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. that B. when C. where D. whether ‎16. ---Could you tell me ____________? ---Sorry, I don’t know. I was not at the meeting.‎ ‎ A. what does he say at the meeting B. what did he say at the meeting ‎ C. what he says at the meeting D. what he said at the meeting ‎17. ---Could you tell me _________ last night? ---Er, I was watching Euro 2004 at home.‎ ‎ A. what you were doing B. what were you doing ‎ C. what you are doing D. what are you doing ‎18. The teacher asked the students __________.‎ ‎ A. if they were interested in dinosaurs B. when was Albert Einstein born ‎ C. what they will do with the computers D. how many trees they have planted ‎19. Every morning the patients are asked if ________ their temperature taken.‎ ‎ A. they had had B. have they had C. they have had D. had they had ‎20. It’s up to you to decide _______ you’ll go there, by air or by road.‎ ‎ A. how B. why C. that D. when 二. 根据汉语句子的意思完成下列英语句子 ‎1. 李明说他对玩电脑游戏感兴趣。‎ ‎ Li Ming says _______ _______ interested in playing computer games.‎ ‎2. 我认为玛丽不回来了。 I don’t think Mary ______ ______.‎ ‎3. 山姆给我说他准备去上海。 Sam told me that he _______ _______ for Shanghai.‎ ‎4. 请你告诉我去钟楼怎麽走吗？ Could you tell me _______ I can get to the Bell Tower?‎ ‎5. 父亲说他买了一台新电脑。 Father said that he ________ ________ a new computer..‎ ‎6. 我想知道今天晚上还有没有去北京的火车。‎ ‎ I want to know _________ there is a train to Beijing.‎ ‎7. 你知道一个双人间多少钱吗？ Do you know ______ _______ a double room ______?‎ ‎8. 请你告诉我我们外出多长时间好吗？‎ ‎ Could you tell me ______ ______ we’re going to be away?‎ ‎9. 叔叔说他正在写一本新小说。 Uncle said that he ______ _______ a new novel.‎ ‎10. 杰克说他有重要事情要做。 Jack said he _______ something important to do.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.C 2.D 3.B 4.B 5.C 6.D 7.C 8.C 9.A 10.C 11.B 12.B 13.C 14.B 15.D 16.D 17.A 18.A 19.C 20.A 二. 1.he is 2.will come 3.was leaving 4.how 5.had bought 6.if (whether) 7.how much 8.how long 9.was writing 10.had 专题12 定语从句 ‎【考点扫描】‎ 中考对定语从句的考查主要集中在以下几个方面：‎ ‎1． 定语从句的功用和结构 ‎2． 关系代词和关系副词的功用 ‎3． 各个关系代词和关系副词的具体用法 考查的主要形式是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。阅读理解和书面表达肯定也要用到定语从句。‎ ‎【名师精讲】 ‎ 一. 定语从句的功用和结构 ‎ 在复合句中，修饰某一名词或代词的从句叫做定语从句。被定从句修饰的词叫做先行词。定语从句必须放在先行词之后。引导定语从句的关联词有关系代词和关系副词。例如：‎ This is the present that he gave me for my birthday.‎ Do you know everybody who came to the party?‎ I still remember the night when I first came to the village?‎ This is the place where Chairman Mao once lived.‎ 二. 关系代词和关系副词的功用 ‎ 关系代词和关系副词用来引导定于从句，在先行词和定语从句之间起纽带作用，使二者联系起来。关系代词和关系副词又在定语从句中充当一个成分。关系待客做主语，宾语，定语，关系副词可作状语。‎ ‎1. 作主语：关系代词在定语从句中作主语时，从句的谓语动词的人称和数须和先行词一致。例如：I don’t like people who talk much but do little.‎ The cars which are produced in Hubei Province sell very well.‎ ‎2. 作宾语：‎ She is the person that I met at the school gate yesterday.‎ The book that my grandmother gave me is called “The Great Escape”.‎ ‎3. 作定语 关系代词whose在定语从句中作定语用。例如：What’s the name of the young man whose sister is a doctor? The girl whose father is a teacher studies very hard.‎ ‎4. 作状语 I’ll never forget the day when I first came to Beijing.‎ This is the house where I was born.‎ 三. 各个关系代词和关系副词的具体用法 ‎1. who 指人，在定语从句中作主语。例如：The person who broke the window must pay for it.‎ The boy who is wearing the black jacket is very clever.‎ ‎2. whom指人，在定语从句中作宾语。例如：‎ Do you know the young man (whom) we met at the gate？‎ Mr Lee (whom) you want to see has come.‎ ‎3. whose 指人，在定语从句中作定语。例如：‎ The girl whose mother is ill is staying at home today.‎ I know the boy whose father is a professor.‎ ‎4. which指物，在定语从中作主语或宾语。例如：‎ A dictionary is a book which gives the meaning of words.‎ Here is the book (which) the teacher mentioned yesterday.‎ ‎5. that多指物，有时也指人，在定语从句中作主语或宾语。例如：‎ I’ve read the newspaper that(which) carries the important news.‎ Who is the person that is reading the newspaper over there?‎ ‎6. when 指时间，在定语从句中作状语。例如：‎ ‎ I’ll never forget the time when we worked on the farm.‎ ‎ He arrived in Beijing on the day when I left.‎ ‎7. where 指地点，在定语从句中作状语。例如：‎ ‎ This is the house where we lived last year.‎ ‎ The factory where his father works is in the east of the city.‎ 四. 关系代词 whom， which 在定语从句中作介词宾语时，可以和介词一起放于先行词与定语从句之间，有时为了关系紧凑也可以将 whom 与 which 与先行词紧挨着书写，而将介词置于定语从句的后面，如：That was the room in which we had lived for ten years. = That was the room which we had lived in for ten years. ‎ 五. 具体使用时还要注意下列问题：‎ ‎1. 只能使用that,不用which 的情况：‎ ‎(1) 先行词是all, few, little, nothing, everything, anything 等不定代词时。例如：All that he said is true. ‎ ‎(2) 先行词被only, no, any, all,等词修饰时。例如：He is the only foreigner that has been to that place. ‎ ‎(3) 先行词是序数词或被序数词修饰的词。例如：He was the second (person) that told me the secret.‎ ‎(4) 先行词是形容词最高级或被形容词最高级修饰的词。This is the best book (that) I have read this year.‎ ‎(5) 先行词既包括人又包括物时。例如：He talked about the people and the things he remembered.‎ ‎2. 只能用which，不用that 的情况：‎ ‎(1) 在非限制性定语从中。例如：The meeting was put off, which was exactly what we wanted.‎ ‎(2) 定语从句由介词+关系代词引导，先行词是物时。例如：The thing about which he is talking is of great importance.‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎1. (哈尔滨中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Does the teacher know everybody _______ planted the trees? ---Yes, he does.‎ ‎ A. which B. whose C. where D. who ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是引导定语从句的关系代词的选择。因为先行词是人，而关系代词又在定语从句中作主语，所以只有who合适。‎ ‎2. (常州市中考试题)‎ ‎ The letter _______ I received from him yesterday is very important.‎ ‎ A. who B. where C. what D. that ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是定语从句的关系代词的选择。因为先行词是物，而关系代词在定语从句中作宾语，所以只有that合适。‎ ‎3. (扬州市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Where is the scientist ________ gave us the talk yesterday?‎ ‎ ---He has gone back to Qinghua University.‎ ‎ A. whom B. who C. whose D. which ‎ 【解析】答案：B。该题考查的是引导定语从句的关系代词的选择。因为先行词是人，而关系代词又在定语从句中作主语，所以只有who合适。‎ ‎4. (益阳市中考试题)I hate people _______ talk much but do little.‎ ‎ A. whose B. whom C. which D. who ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是引导定语从句的关系代词的选择。因为先行词是人，而关系代词又在定语从句中作主语，所以只有who合适。‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1. ---Who is the man _______ was talking to our English teacher?‎ ‎ ---Oh! It’s Mr Baker, our maths teacher.‎ ‎ A. he B. that C. whom D. which ‎2. I hate the people ________ don’t help others when they are in trouble.‎ ‎ A. who B. which C. they D. where ‎3. The foreigner _________ visited our school is from Canada.‎ ‎ A. which B. when C. who D. whom ‎4. George Mallory was an English school teacher _______ loved climbing.‎ ‎ A. who B. whom C. he D. which ‎5. This is the place _____I have ever visited.‎ ‎ A. there B. when C. where D. which ‎6. Nobody knows the reason ______ she didn’t come to the meeting.‎ ‎ A. that B. which C. why D. when ‎7. The moon is a world ______ there is no life.‎ ‎ A. that B. which C. where D. why ‎8. He has forgotten the day _______ he arrived.‎ ‎ A. when B. where C. that D. which ‎9. He still remembers the days ______ he spent with your family.‎ ‎ A. when B. where C. that D. on which ‎10. Mr. White, ______ car had been stolen, came to the policeman.‎ ‎ A. who B. that C. whose D. which ‎11. He got to the village _______ his family once lived before liberation.‎ ‎ A. that B. which C. when D. where ‎12. This is the house _______ I want to buy.‎ ‎ A. in which B. that C. whose D. where ‎13. This is the house _______ our beloved Premier Zhou once lived and worked.‎ ‎ A. which B. that C. when D. where ‎14. He didn’t tell me the place _______ he was born.‎ ‎ A. that B. which C. when D. where ‎15. He lived in a small village, ______ was a long way from the railway station.‎ ‎ A. that B. which C. where D. when 二. 用关系代词或关系副词将下列每对句子连成一个复合句 ‎1. The boy is my younger brother. He was here a minute ago.‎ ‎2. The old man is a professor. He teaches chemistry in a college.‎ ‎3. Beijing Hotel is near Tian An Men Square. The foreign visitors live there.‎ ‎4. The woman is here now. You were talking about her.‎ ‎5. This is the hall. We listened to the report in it the other day.‎ ‎6. The car was going 90 miles an hour. The car just passed us.‎ ‎7. The man waved to us. The man was my uncle.‎ ‎8. I enjoyed reading the book. You gave me a book last week.‎ ‎9. I prefer the subject. The subject is science.‎ ‎10. I spoke to the man. The man is a professor.‎ 三. 用适当的关系代词或关系副词填空 ‎1. The house _______ we live in is very big.‎ ‎2. The boy ______ is wearing the black jacket is very clever.‎ ‎3. This is the present _____ he gave me for my birthday.‎ ‎4. The man _______ talked to you just now is an engineer.‎ ‎5. He talked about the teachers and schools _______ he had visited.‎ ‎6. There is nothing in the world _______ can frighten him.‎ ‎7. She wears a gold ring, _______ is very uncommon in our class.‎ ‎8. We visited a factory _______ makes toys for children.‎ ‎9. Is this the place _______ your father once lived?‎ ‎10. I’ll never forget the days _______ I joined the League.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.B 2.A 3.C 4.A 5.D 6.C 7.C 8.A 9.C 10.C 11.D 12.B 13.D 14.D 15.B 二. 1.The boy who was here a minute ago is my younger brother.‎ ‎2. The old man who teaches chemistry in a college is a professor.‎ ‎3. Beijing Hotel where the foreign visitors live is near Tian An Men Square.‎ ‎4. The woman whom you were talking about is here now.‎ ‎5. This is the hall where we listened to the report the other day.‎ ‎6. The car which just passed us was going 90 miles an hour.‎ ‎7. The man who waved us was my uncle.‎ ‎8. I enjoyed reading the book you gave me last week.‎ ‎9. The subject I prefer is science.‎ ‎10.The man I spoke to is a professor.‎ 三. 1.that/ which 2.who/ that 3.that/ which 4.who/ that 5.that 6.that 7.which 8.which/ that 9.where 10.when 专题13 状语从句 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1. 时间状语从句2. 条件状语从句3. 原因状语从句4. 结果状语从句5. 比较状语从句6. 目的状语从句7. 让步状语从句8. 地点状语从句 ‎【名师点睛】‎ ‎ 用来修饰主句中的动词，副词和形容词的从句叫状语从句。根据其含义状语从句可分为时间状语从句，地点状语从句，条件状语从句， 原因状语从句，结果状语从句，比较状语从句，目的状语从句，让步状语从句。‎ ‎1. 时间状语从句 ‎(1)时间状语从句常用when, as, while, before, after, since, till, until, as soon as等连词来引导。例如：‎ It was raining hard when I got to school yesterday.‎ While he was doing his homework, the telephone rang.‎ As he walked along the lake, he sang happily.‎ He had learned a little Chinese before he came to China.‎ After he finished middle school, he went to work in a factory.‎ ‎(2)在时间状语从句里，通常不用将来时态，用现在时态表示将来的动作或状态。例如：‎ I’ll ring you up as soon as I get to New York.‎ I will tell him everything when he comes back.‎ He won’t believe it until he sees it with his own eyes.‎ ‎(3)在带有till或until引导的时间状语从句的主从复合句里，如果主句用肯定式，其含义是 ‎“一直到……时”，谓语动词只能用延续性动词。如果主句用否定式，其含义是“直到……才……”, “在……以前不……”, 谓语动词可用瞬间动词。例如：‎ The young man read till the light went out.‎ Let’s wait until the rain stops.‎ We won’t start until Bob comes.‎ Don’t get off until the bus stops.‎ ‎2. 条件状语从句 ‎(1)条件状语从句通常由if, unless引导。例如：‎ What shall we do if it snows tomorrow?‎ Don’t leave the building unless I tell you to.‎ ‎(2)在条件状语从句里，谓语动词通常用现在时态表示将来的动作或状态。例如：‎ I’ll help you with your English if I am free tomorrow.‎ He won’t be late unless he is ill.‎ ‎(3)“祈使句 + and (or)+ 陈述句” 在意思上相当于一个带有条件状语从句的复合句。例如：‎ Hurry up, or you’ll be late.=If you don’t hurry up, you’ll be late.‎ Study hard and you will pass the exam.=If you study hard, you will pass the exam.‎ ‎3. 原因状语从句 ‎(1)原因状语从句通常由because, since, as引导。例如：‎ He didn’t come to school because he was ill.‎ As it is raining, we shall not go the zoo.‎ Since you can’t answer the question, I’ll ask someone else.‎ ‎(2)because表示直接原因，语气最强。Because引导的原因状语从句多放在主句之后。回答由why提出的问题，只能用because。As和since语气较弱，一般用来表示明显的原因。由as和since引导的原因状语从居多放在句首。例如：‎ ‎------Why aren’t going there?‎ ‎------Because I don’t want to.‎ As he has no car, he can’t get there easily.‎ Since we have no money, we can’t buy it.‎ ‎(3)because和so不能同用在一个句子里。‎ ‎4. 结果状语从句 ‎(1)结果状语从句由so…that, such…that, so that引导。例如：‎ He is so poor that he can’t buy a bike for his son.‎ She is such a good teacher that everybody likes her.‎ My pencil fell under the desk, so that I couldn’t see it.‎ ‎(2)so…that语such...that可以互换。例如：‎ 在由so...that引导的结果状语从句中，so是副词，与形容词连用。其结构是: “...so + 形容词（副词）+ that + 从句”。例如：‎ He was so glad that he couldn’t say a word.‎ The hall is so big that it can hold 2,000 people.‎ Mother lives so far away that we hardly ever see her.‎ 在由such…that引导的结果状语从句中，such是形容词，它修饰的可以是单数或复数可数名词，也可以是不可数名词；名词前面可以带形容词，也可不带。如果是单数可数名词，前面需加不定冠词a或an。例如：‎ It was such a hot day that nobody wanted to do anything.‎ He had such long arms that he could almost touch the ceiling.‎ He made such rapid progress that he did very well in the mid-term.‎ ‎ 有时上述两种结构是可以互换的。例如：‎ It was such a wonderful film that all of us wanted to see it again.‎ ‎=The film was so wonderful that all of us wanted to see it again.‎ It is such an important match that nobody wants to miss it.‎ ‎=The match is so important that nobody wants to miss it.‎ ‎(3)如果名词前由many, much, little, few等词修饰时，只能用so, 不用such。例如：‎ Soon there were so many deer that they ate up all the wild roses.‎ He has so little time that he can’t go to the cinema with you.‎ ‎5. 比较状语从句 比较状语从句通常由as…as, 比较级 + than…等连词引导。例如：‎ Tom runs faster than John does.‎ This classroom is as big as that one.‎ ‎6. 目的状语从句 ‎(1)目的状语从句通常由 so that, in order that引导。例如：‎ We started early so that we could catch the first train.‎ He studies hard so that he could work better in the future.‎ We used the computer in order that we might save time.‎ ‎(2)so that既可引导目的状语从句，又可引导结果状语从句。区别这两种从句的办法有两个：1)目的状语从句里往往带有情态动词can, could, may, might等。2)从意思上看，目的状语从句往往表示的目的很明确。例如：‎ Speak clearly so that they may understand you. (目的状语从句)‎ Jack is badly ill so that he has to rest. (结果状语从句)‎ ‎7. 让步状语从句 ‎(1)让步状语从句通常由although, though等连词引导。例如：‎ Though he is young, he knows a lot.‎ Although I am tired, I must go on working.‎ ‎(2)although(though)不能和but用在同一个句子中。例如：‎ 我们不能说：Though it was raining hard, but he still went out.‎ 应该说：Though it was raining hard, he still went out.或It was raining hard, but he still went out.‎ ‎8. 地点状语从句 ‎ 地点状语从句常常由where来引导。例如：‎ ‎ Go where you like.‎ ‎ Where there is a will, there is a way.‎ ‎【实例解析】‎ ‎1. (2004年北京市海淀区中考试题)‎ ‎ You will stay healthy _______ you do more exercise, such as running and walking.‎ ‎ A. if B. how C. before D. where ‎ 答案：A。该题考查的是引导状语从句的从属连词的选择。从意思上看，从句应是一个条件状语从句，在这四个选项中只有if能引导条件状语从句，所以选A。‎ ‎2. (2004年江西省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Shall we go on working?‎ ‎ ---Yes, _________ I prefer to have a rest.‎ ‎ A. when B. if C. because D. though ‎ 答案：D。该题考查的是引导状语从句的从属连词的选择。从意思上看，只有选though才能说得通。‎ ‎3. (2004年徐州市中考试题)‎ ‎ None of us knew what had happened _________ they told us about it.‎ ‎ A. when B. until C. after D. though ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是引导状语从句的从属连词选择。本句的意思是“在……以前我们没人知道这件事。”要表达着一意思应用“not…until” 这一句型。‎ ‎4. (2004年泉州市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---I hope you’ll enjoy your trip, dear!‎ ‎ ---Thank you, mum. I’ll give you a call _________ I get there.‎ ‎ A. until B. as soon as C. since D. till ‎ 答案：B。该题考查的是引导状语从句的从属连词的选择。本题的意思是“一到那里，我就给你打电话。”要表达这个意思应选用as soon as。‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 单项填空 ‎1. _______ he’s old, he can still carry this heavy bag.‎ ‎ A. Though B. Since C. For D. So ‎2. ---Do you know if he _______ to play basket ball with us?‎ ‎ ---I think he will come if he ______ free tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. comes; is B. comes; will be C. will come; is D. will come; will be ‎3. In the zoo if a child _____ into the water and can’t swim, the dolphins may come up ______ him.‎ ‎ A. will fall; to help B. falls; to help ‎ C. will fall; help D. falls; helping ‎4. I don’t remember ________ he worked in that city when he was young.‎ ‎ A. what B. which C. where D. who ‎5. We will stay at home if my aunt ________ to visit us tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. comes B. come C. will come D. is coming ‎6. The police asked the children _______ cross the street ________ the traffic lights turned green.‎ ‎ A. not; before B. don’t; when C. not to; until D. not; after ‎7. I was late for class yesterday _______ there was something wrong with my bike.‎ ‎ A. when B. that C. until D. because ‎8. I’ll go swimming with you if I ________ free tomorrow.‎ ‎ A. will be B. shall be C. am D. was ‎9. In the exam, the ________ you are, the _______ mistakes you will make.‎ ‎ A. careful; little B. more careful; fewest ‎ C. more careful; fewer D. more careful; less ‎10. You should finish your lessons _______ you go out to play.‎ ‎ A. before B. after C. when D. while ‎11. I hurried _____ I wouldn’t be late for class.‎ ‎ A. since B. so that C. as if D. unless ‎12. When you read the book, you’d better make a mark _______ you have any questions.‎ ‎ A. which B. that C. where D. though ‎13. The teacher raised his voice _______ all the students could hear him.‎ ‎ A. for B. so that C. because D. in order ‎14. He took off his coat _______ he felt hot.‎ ‎ A. because B. as C. if D. since ‎15. It is ______ that we’d like to go out for a walk.‎ ‎ A. a lovely day B. too lovely a day C. so lovely a day D. such lovely a day ‎16. Mary had ______ much work to do that she stayed at her office all day.‎ ‎ A. such B. so C. too D. very ‎17. _______ I felt very tired, I tried to finish the work.‎ ‎ A. Although B. Because C. As D. As if ‎18. ______ the day went on, the weather got worse.‎ ‎ A. With B. Since C. While D. As ‎19. ______ well you can drive, you must drive carefully.‎ ‎ A. So long as B. In order that C. No matter how D. The moment ‎20. Write to me as soon as you ________ to Beijing.‎ ‎ A. will get B. get C. getting D. got 二. 根据中文意思完成下列英语句子 ‎1. 不管他跟我开什么玩笑，我都不生气。‎ ‎ I am not angry with him, _______ _______ ______ jokes he ______ on me.‎ ‎2. 布鲁斯太太对学生非常亲切，以至于学生把她当作母亲。‎ ‎ Mrs. Bruce was _______ kind to her students ______ they ______ her _____ their mother.‎ ‎3. 只要我们竭尽全力，父母就会满意我们的表现。‎ ‎ Our parents will be pleased with our performance _____ _____ ______ we try our best.‎ ‎4. 你一到上海就给我打个电话好吗？‎ ‎ Will you please call me ______ ______ ______ you get to Shanghai.‎ ‎5. 这个七岁的女孩酷爱钢琴，以至于他已经坚持练习两年了。‎ ‎ The seven-year-old girl likes playing the piano ______ ______ ______ she has kept ‎ practicing for two years.‎ ‎6. 虽然她很忙，他还坚持自学英语。‎ ‎ _______ _______ ______ _______, she kept on learning English by herself.‎ ‎7. 他长大后相当一名记者。‎ ‎ He wants to be a journalist ______ _______ _______ _______.‎ ‎8. 无论刮风下雨，我们的老师总是第一个到校。‎ ‎_______ _______ windy or rainy, our teacher is always the first to get to school.‎ ‎9. 如果人人为保护环境做出贡献，世界将会变得更美好。‎ ‎ ______ ______ ______ _____ _______ to protecting the environment, the world will become much more beautiful.‎ ‎10. 李明昨天没来上学，因为他病了。‎ ‎ Li Ming didn’t come to school _______ _______ ______ ______.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.A 2.C 3.B 4.C 5.A 6.C 7.D 8.C 9.C 10.A 11.B 12.C 13.B 14.A 15.C 16.B 17.A 18.D 19.C 20.B 二. 1. no matter what; plays 2.so; that; regarded; as 3. as long as 4. as long as 5. so much that 6. Though she was busy 7. when he grows up 8.Whether it’s 9. If everyone makes a contribution 10.‎ ‎ because he was ill 专题14 主谓一致 ‎【考点直击】‎ ‎1. 语法一致的原则 ‎2. 意义一致的原则 ‎3. 邻近一致的原则 ‎【名师点睛】‎ 谓语受主语支配，须和主语在人称和数上保持一致，这叫做主谓一致。主谓 一致一般遵循三条原则：语法一致原则，意义一致原则和就近一致原则。‎ ‎1. 语法一致的原则 ‎（1）以单数名词或代词，动词不定式短语作主语时，谓语动词要用单数;主语为复数时，谓语用复数，例如：He goes to school early every morning. The children are playing outside.‎ To work hard is necessary for a student.‎ ‎（2）由and或both……and连接的并列成分作主语时，谓语动词用复数。例如：‎ Both he and I are right.‎ Mr Black and Mrs Black have a son called Tom.‎ 但并列主语如果指的是同一人，同一事物或同一概念，谓语动词用单数。‎ 例如：His teacher and friend is a beautiful girl. The poet and writer has come.‎ ‎（3）由and连接的并列单数主语之前如果分别由each, every修饰时，其谓语动词要用单数形式。例如：In our country every boy and every girl has the right to receive education.‎ Each man and each woman is asked to help.‎ ‎（4）主语是单数时，尽管后面跟有 but ,except, besides, with 等介词短语，谓语动词仍用单数。例如：The teacher with his students is going to visit the museum.‎ Nobody but two boys was late for class. Bread and butter is a daily food in the west.‎ ‎（5） 一些只有复数形式的名词，如people, police, cattle, clothes等作主语时，谓语动词要用复数。例如：A lot of people are dancing outside. The police are looking for lost boy.‎ ‎（6）由each, some, any, no, every 构成的复合代词作主语时，谓语动词都用单数。‎ 例如：Is everybody ready? Somebody is using the phone.‎ ‎（7）有两部分构成的物体的名词，如glasses, shoes, trousers, chopsticks, scissors 等作主语时，谓语动词用复数。例如：Where are my shoes? I can’t find them. Your trousers are dirty. You’d better change them.‎ 如果这类名词前用了a pair of等，则往往用作单数，谓语动词的单复数形式往往取决于pair的单复数形式。例如： Here are some new pairs of shoes. My new pair of socks is on the bed.‎ ‎2. 意义一致的原则 ‎（1）表时间、距离、价格、度量衡等的名词作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数。‎ 例如：Twenty years is not a long time. Ten dollars is too dear.‎ ‎（2）有些集合名词，如family, team等作主语时，如作为一个整体看待，谓语动词用单数；如指其中每个成员，则用复数。例如：My family is big one. My family are watching TV.‎ ‎（3）不定代词由all, most, more, some, any, none作主语时，也要依这些代词表示的意义来决定谓语动词的单复数形式。如果代词代表复数可数名词，谓语动词用复数；如果代词代表单数可数名词或不可数名词，谓语动词用单数。‎ 例如：All of the work has been finished. All of the people have gone.‎ ‎（4）疑问代词作主语时，其谓语动词也有两种情况：主语表示复数意义，谓语动词用复数；主语表示单数意义，则谓语动词用单数。‎ 例如： Who is your brother? Who are League members?‎ ‎（5）“分数或百分数+of+名词”构成的词组作主语时，其谓语动词要以of后面的名词而定。名词是复数，谓语动词用复数：名词是单数，谓语动词用单数。例如：It is said that 35 per cent of the doctors are women. Three –fourths of the surface of the earth is sea.‎ ‎（6）half, the rest等表示不定数量的名词作主语时，如果所指为复数意义，动词用复数；如果所指为单数意义，动词用单数。例如：I have read a large part of the book, the rest is more difficult. Only ten students attended the class because all the rest were off sick.‎ ‎（7）由what 引导地主于从句作主语时，通常谓语动词用单数形式。但如果所指内容为复数意义时，谓语动词用复数形式。例如： What she said is correct. What she left me are a few old books.‎ ‎（8）凡是以“定冠词+形容词（或分词）”作主语，往往根据意义一致的原则决定谓语动词的单复数形式。如果这种主语指的是一类人，谓语动词用复数；如果指的是一个人或抽象概念，谓语动词用单数形式。例如：The sick have been cured and the lost have been found.‎ The dead is a famous person.‎ ‎3. 邻近一致的原则 ‎（1）由连词or, either……or, neither……nor, not only…but also,等连接的并列主语，如果一个是单数，一个是复数，则谓语动词按就近一致原则，与最靠近它的主语一致。‎ 例如：Either you or I am right. Neither the children nor the teacher knows anything about it.‎ ‎（2）在“There be” 句型中,谓语动词和靠近的主语一致。 ‎ There are two apples and one egg in it. ‎ ‎（3）as well as 和名词连用时,谓语动词和第一个名词相一致。 ‎ He as well as I is responsible for it. 不但是我，他对这件事也有责任。‎ ‎（4）以here开头的句子，其谓语动词和靠近的主语一致。‎ ‎ Here is a letter and some books for you.‎ ‎【中考演练】‎ 一. 选择填空 ‎1. How time flies! Ten years ________ passed.‎ A. have B. has C. is D. are ‎2.Not only his parents but also his brother ______ to the Summer Palace. They haven’t been back.‎ ‎ A. have been B. have gone C. has been D. has gone ‎3. Neither my father ________ going to see the patient.‎ ‎ A. nor I am B. nor I are C. or me are D. or me is ‎4. Look! There _______ playing with the tourists on Yinhe Square.‎ A. are a number of deer B. are a number of deers C. is a number of deer D. is a number of deers ‎5. They said the eighteenth and last lesson _______ quite easy.‎ ‎ A. is B. was C. are D. were ‎6. ---When are you going to Kumming for your holidays?‎ ‎ ---I haven’t decided. ______ this Sunday ______ next Sunday is OK.‎ ‎ A. Both; and B. Either; or C. Neither; nor D. Not only; but also ‎7. ______ Helen ______ Joan speaks beautiful Chinese after they came to China.‎ ‎ A. Neither; nor B. Not only; but also C. Both; and D. A and B ‎8. _______ of them has his own opinion.‎ ‎ A. Both B. Some C. Every D. Each ‎9. Are there any _______ on the farm?‎ ‎ A. horse B. duck C. chicken D. sheep ‎10. My shirt _____ white and my trousers _____ blue.‎ A. are; are B. are; is C. is; is D. is; are ‎11. ------Two months _______ quite a long time.‎ ‎------Yes. I’m afraid that he will miss a lot of lessons.‎ A. is B. are C. was D. were ‎12. The old man has two children but _____ of them lives with him.‎ A. both B. none C. neither D. all ‎13. Our knowledge of computer _____ growing all the time.‎ A. be B. is C. are D. were ‎14. Everyone except Tom and John _____ there when the meeting began.‎ A. is B. was C. are D. were ‎15. Most of the houses _______ this year.‎ A. has built B. have built C. has been built D. have been built ‎16. I think maths _____ very difficult to learn.‎ A. is B. are C. has D. have ‎17. A large number of students _____ to work in Xingjiang.‎ A. have gone B. has gone C. goes D. is going ‎18. The number of the students in the class ______ small.‎ A. are B. is C. have D. were ‎19. There _____ a lot of good news in today’s newspaper.‎ A. is B. are C. was D. were 二. 用所给动词的适当形式填空 ‎1. _____ (be) everything OK?‎ ‎2. Nobody _______ (know) the answer to the question.‎ ‎3. Ten divided by two _______ (be) five.‎ ‎4. Most of the drinking water ______ (be) from the Black River.‎ ‎5. Not only she but also I _______ (do) morning exercises every day.‎ ‎6. Either you or she _____ (have) made a wrong decision.‎ ‎7. The family _____(be) spending the weekend together.‎ ‎8. Bread and butter ______ (be) her daily breakfast.‎ ‎9. The police _____ (be) trying to catch the thief.‎ ‎10. The number of people invited _____ fifty, but a number of them ____ absent for different reasons.‎ 三. 翻译下列句 ‎1.我们两个人都没有看这部电影。 ___________________________.‎ ‎2.我的茶杯里没有水了。 ___________________________.‎ ‎3.不是他就是我要到哪儿去。 ___________________________.‎ ‎4.学生们和老师都不知道这件事。 ___________________________.‎ ‎5.我们家正在一起度周末。 ___________________________.‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1-5BDAAB 6-10BDDDD 11-15ACBBD 16-19AABA 二. 1.Is 2.knows 3.is 4.is 5.do 6.has 7.are 8.is 9.are 10.was; were 三. 1.Neither of us has seen the film.‎ ‎2.There is no water in my cup.‎ ‎3.Either he or I is going there.‎ ‎4.Neither the students nor the teacher knows this matter.‎ ‎5.Our family are spending the weekend together.‎ 专题15 交际用语 ‎【考点扫描】‎ 近年来的中考试题中，对日常交际用语的考查比重越来越大。涉及到在各种情景下的问和答；涉及到英语国家的文化习俗；涉及到口语和书面表达。考查的形式有听力理解，有补全对话，有单项选择，有情景反应，有书面表达。‎ ‎【名师精讲】‎ 初中阶段要掌握的30个日常交际项目是：‎ ‎1.问候 Greetings a.Good morning/afternoon/evening. Hello/Hi. How are you?‎ b.Fine, thank you, And you?Very well, thank you.‎ ‎2.介绍 Introductions a.This is Mr/Mrs/Miss/Comrade….‎ b.How do you do? Nice/Glad to see/meet you.c.My name is….I’m a student/worker etc.(here).‎ ‎3.告别 Farewells ‎ a.I think it’s time for to leave now.‎ b.Goodbye! (Bye-bye! Bye!) See you later/tomorrow. (See you.) Good night.‎ ‎4.打电话 Making telephone calls a.Hello! May I speak to …?Is that… (speaking)?‎ b.Hold on, please.He/She isn’t here right now.Can I take a message for you?‎ c.I called to tell/ask you…d.Goodbye.‎ ‎5.感谢和应答 Thanks and responses a.Thank you (very much).Thanks a lot.Many thanks.Thanks for…‎ b.Not at all.That’s all right.You’re welcome.‎ ‎6.祝愿，祝贺和应答 Good wishes, congratulations, responses a.Good luck!Best wishes to you.Have a nice/good time.Congratulations!‎ c.Thank you.‎ d.Happy New Year!Merry Christmas!Happy birthday to you.‎ e.The same to you.‎ ‎7.意愿 Intentions ‎ I’m going to…I will... I’d like to… I want/hope to…‎ ‎8.道歉和应答 Apologies and responses a.I’m sorry. (Sorry.)I’m sorry for/about…Excuse me.‎ b.That’s all right.It doesn’t matter.That’s nothing.‎ ‎9.遗憾和同情 Regrets and sympathy at a pity!I’m sorry to hear…‎ ‎10.邀请和应答 Invitations and responses a.Will you come to…?Would you like to…?‎ b.Yes, I’d love to…Yes, it’s very kind/nice of you.‎ c.I’d love to, but…‎ ‎11.提供（帮助等）和应答 Offers and responses a.Can I help you?What can I do for you?Here, take this/my…Let me…for you.‎ Would you like some…?‎ b.Thanks. That would be nice/fine.Thank you for your help.Yes, please.‎ c.No, thanks/thank you.That’s very kind of you, but…‎ ‎12.请求允许和应答 Asking for permission and responses a.May I…?Can/Could I…?b.Yes/Certainly.Yes, do please.Of course (you may).‎ That’s Ok/all right.‎ c.I’m sorry, but…You’d better not.‎ ‎13.表示同意和不同意 Expressing agreement and disagreement a.Certainly/Sure/Of course.Yes, please.Yes, I think so.‎ b.That’s true/OK.That’s a good idea.I agree (with you).‎ c.No, I don’t think so.I’m afraid not.I really can’t agree with you.‎ ‎14.表示肯定和不肯定 Expressing certainty and uncertainty a.I’m sure.I’m sure (that) …‎ b.I’m not sure.I’m not sure whether/if…‎ c.Maybe/Perhaps ‎15.喜好和厌恶 Likes and dislikes a.I like/love… (very much).I like/love to…‎ b.I don’t like (to) …I hate (to) …‎ ‎16.谈论天气 Talking about the weather a.What’s the weather like today?How’s the weather in…?‎ b.It’s fine/cloudy/windy/rainy, etc.It’s rather warm/cold/hot/etc. today, isn’t it?‎ ‎17.购物 Shopping a.What can I do for you?May/Can I help you?‎ b.I want/I’d like…How much is it?That’s too much/expensive, I’m afraid.‎ That’s fine. I’ll take it.Let me have…kilo/box, etc.‎ c.How many/much do you want? at colour/size/kind do you want?‎ d.Do you have any other kind/size/colour,etc.?‎ ‎18.问路和应答 Asking the way and responses a.Excuse me. Where’s the men’s/ladies’ room?Excuse me, can you tell me the way to…?‎ How can I get to…? I don’t know the way.‎ b.Go down this street.Turn right/left at the first/second crossing. ’s about …metres from here.‎ ‎19.问时间或日期和应答 Asking the time or date and responses a.What day is (it) today?What’s the date today?What time is it?What’s the time, please?‎ b.It’s Monday/Tuesday, etc.It’s January 10th.It’s five o,clock/half past five/a quarter to five/five thirty, etc. s time for…‎ ‎20.请求 Requests a.Can/Could you…for me?Will/would you please…?May I have…?‎ b.Please give/pass me…Please wait (here/a moment).Please wait for your turn.‎ Please stand in line/line up.Please hurry.‎ c.Don’t rush/crowd.No noise, please.No smoking, please.‎ ‎21.劝告和建议 Advice and suggestions a.You’d better…You should…You need (to)…‎ b.Shall we…?Let’s…What /How about…?‎ ‎22.禁止和警告 Prohibition and warnings a.You can’t/mustn’t…If you…, you’ll…‎ b.Take care !Be careful !Look out !‎ ‎23.表示感情 Expressing certain emotions a.喜悦 Pleasure, joyI’m glad/pleased/happy to…That’s nice.That’s wonderful/great.‎ b.焦虑 AnxietyWhat’s wrong?What’s the matter (with you)?I’m/He’s/She’s worried.‎ Oh, what shall I/we do?‎ c.惊奇 SurpriseReally?Oh dear?Is that so?‎ ‎24.就餐 Taking meals a.What would you like to have?Would you like something to eat/drink?‎ b.I’d like…Would you like some more…?Help yourself to some…‎ c.Thank you. I’ve had enough/Just a little, please.‎ ‎25.约会 Making appointments a.Are you free this afternoon/evening?How about tomorrow morning/afternoon/evening?‎ Shall we meet at 4: 30 at…?‎ b.Yes, that’s all right.Yes, I’ll be free then.‎ c.No, I won’t be free then. But I’ll be free…‎ a. All right. See you then.‎ ‎26.传递信息 Passing on a message a.Will you please give this note/message to…?‎ b.asked me to give you this note.‎ c.Thanks for the message.‎ ‎27.看病 Seeing the doctor a.There’s something wrong with…I’ve got a cough.I feel terrible(bad).I don’t feel well.‎ I’ve got a pain here.This place hurts.‎ b.Take this medicine three times a day.Drink plenty of water and have a good rest.‎ It’s nothing serious.You’ll be right/well soon.‎ ‎28.求救 Calling for help a.Help!b.What’s the matter?‎ ‎29.语言困难 Language difficulties ‎ Pardon. Please say that again/more slowly. What do you mean by…? I’m sorry I can’t follow you.‎ ‎ I’m sorry I know only a little English.‎ ‎30.常见的标志和说明 Some common signs and instructions BUSINESS HOURS FRAGILEOFFICE HOURS THIS SIDE UP OPEN ‎ ‎ MENU CLOSED NO SMOKING PULL NO PARKING PUSH NO PHOTOS ‎ ON DANGER! OFF PLAY ENTRANCE STOP EXIT PAUSE INSTRUCTIONS ‎ ‎ ‎ 同学们在中考复习时，首先应熟记教材第一至三册中出现的常用交际用语和习惯表达法。重点掌握问路、打电话、购物、看病、就餐和谈论天气等六种情景中的表达方法。明确学习交际用语的目的是为了培养与讲英语人士进行口头交际的能力。学习日常交际用语，要了解西方的风土人情，必须记住一些典型的日常交际用语；要明确谈话的场合和对象，因为在许多交际场合，怎么问和怎么答都有一些约定俗成的语言；要注意中西文化传统和背景的不同，使用得体的语言。因此，同学们必须熟悉这些套话，熟练地掌握它们。这样才能结合自己所处的环境，知道在什么时候、什么地方、用什么方式、对什么人使用恰当的语言表达出自己的意思，给予正确的应答，还要能自如应付各种形式的测试，如单项选择、对号入座、补全对话及排列顺序等。 做这类题目的思路和方法归纳起来有以下九点：‎ ‎1. 要根据不同的情景，使用不同的表达法。2. 要正确判断出对话的情景。‎ ‎3. 问话或答语不能离题。4. 用筛选法选择正确对话。5. 从语意进行判断。‎ ‎6. 根据习惯用法进行选择。7. 答语要符合西方人的文化、风俗和习惯。‎ ‎8. 要使用文明礼貌的语言。9. 要遵照口语交际特点，不要死套语法规则。‎ ‎【中考范例】‎ ‎1. (北京市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Would you like to go out for a walk with us?‎ ‎---_________, but I must finish my homework first.‎ ‎ A. Of course not B. That’s all rightC. I’d love to D. Yes, I do ‎ 【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是如何婉拒别人的邀请。对方邀请出去散步，但因为要做家庭作业而婉言拒绝。符合这一情景的答语只有C。‎ ‎2. (江西省中考试题)‎ ‎ ---I haven’t seen Jack for three days. Is he ill?‎ ‎---________. His mother told me that he was in hospital.‎ ‎ A. I am afraid so B. I hope not C. I don’t expect D. I am afraid not ‎ 【解析】答案：A。该题考查的是如何回答别人的询问。对方询问某人是否有病，由于答话人已经知道某人有病（从后一句答语可知），只能给出肯定回答。‎ ‎3. (济宁市中考试题)‎ ‎ ---Thank you for your delicious dinner. ---__________.‎ ‎ A. Don’t say that B. It’s nothing C. I don’t think so D. I’m glad you enjoyed it ‎ 【解析】答案：D。该题考查的是如何回答别人的感谢和赞扬。说英语国家的人在回答别人的感谢和赞扬时与中国人的习惯不同, 他们不是自我谦虚，而是表示高兴。‎ ‎4. (济宁市中考试题)‎ ‎ Turn the box over, please. Can’t you see the words “________”?‎ ‎ A. DANGER B. MENU C. THIS SIDE UP D. FRAGILE ‎ 【解析】答案：C。该题考查的是常用英语标志和说明。只有看到箱子上有 “THIS SIDE UP”这样的标志，才能发现箱子放倒了，才会让对方把箱子反过来。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【满分演练】‎ 一. 单项选择 ‎1. ---I hope you don’t mind my pointing out your mistakes.----_________ .‎ A. Not at all B. You’re welcomeC. Of course D. It’s a pleasure ‎2. ---I’m sorry. I’ve broken your cup.---_______ .‎ A. It doesn’t matter B. Thank youC. Not at all D. Excuse me ‎3. ---Shall we go to the zoo tomorrow?---_________‎ A. It doesn’t matter. B. That’s nothing.C. Good idea! D. You’re welcome.‎ ‎4. ---Will you go shopping together with us this Sunday, Jenny?---Yes, __________.‎ ‎ A. I do B. I’d like to C. I’d love to do D. I’m busy ‎5. ---What a nice meal! Thank you for having us. ---________.‎ ‎ A. It doesn’t matter B. It was a pleasureC. Not nice enough D. With pleasure ‎6. --Wish you a happy New Year! ---________.‎ ‎ A. The same to you B. You do too C. The same as you D. You have it too ‎7. ---Hello. May I speak to Tom Smith? ---Yes. _______.‎ ‎ A. My name’s Tom Smith B. I’m Tom Smith C. This is Tom Smith D. Tom Smith’s me ‎8. ---What are Johnson’s family like? ---____________.‎ ‎ A. His family is just like mine B. They all like sports and games ‎ C. Oh, it’s really a big one D. They are all warm-hearted and helpful ‎9. ---Do you mind if I open the door? ---_______.‎ ‎ A. No, of course not B. Yes, please C. Yes, you can D. No, you can’t open it ‎10.---Help yourself to some fruit. ---__________‎ ‎ A. Thank you. B. Yes, I like it very much. C. OK. It’s nothing serious. D. Really?‎ 二. 交际英语 ‎1. ---__________________ ?---Hold on, please.‎ A. Are you Bruce, please B. Who are you C. Are you at home, Bruce D. May I speak to Bruce, please ‎2. ---Could you tell me how to get to Peterson Building, please?---________________.‎ A. Don’t ask me B. Sure. You can take the No.3 bus C. You’re welcome D. Thank you all the same ‎3. ---Oh, what a nice picture! You draw very well.---________________.‎ A. Yes, it’s very bad B. Yours is good C. Of course not D. Thank you ‎4. ---What’s wrong with you?---_________________.‎ A. I’ve got a headache B. She’ll take some medicin C. I’ve got a new bike D. I’m a doctor5. ---Happy New Year!---________________.‎ A. You are happy B. The same to you C. Happy birthday D. Yes, I’m happy, too ‎6. ---What’s the weather like?---_______________. A. I like the weather B. It’s sunn C. I don’t like the weather D. It’s rain ‎7. ---________________?---It’s Saturday.‎ A. What’s the dateB. What time is itC. What day is it todayD. How much is it ‎8. ---Would you like to come to my house for supper?---__________________.‎ A. I’d love to. But I’m afraid I can’tB. Yes, I can’tC. No, I wouldD. Yes, I wouldn’t ‎9. ---What can I do for you, madam?---__________________.‎ A. I can help myselfB. No, I don’t need C. Yes, please help meD. I’d like to buy a pair of shoes of my daughter ‎10. ---I’ve passed the exam.---__________________.‎ A. Congratulations! B. Bad luck! C. Thank you for telling me .D. It’s nothing.‎ 三. 补全对话 John: Hello, Jim. May I come in?‎ Jim: Oh, hello, John. Yes, come in, please.‎ John: You don’t look well. What’s the matter?‎ Jim: __1__‎ John: Oh dear! Why don’t you go to bed for a rest?‎ Jim: __2__ ‎ John: shall I call him and tell him you’re ill?‎ Jim: __3__ ‎ John: OK. I’ll do that. I’m going to the shops now. Can I get you some medicice?‎ Jim: __4__ ‎ John: Yes, of course. Is there anything else I can do?‎ Jim: __5__‎ John: see you later then. Take care!‎ A. Oh, yes, please. His number is in the phone book.‎ B. No, I’ll be all right. Thanks for your help.‎ C. My head hurts and I feel really hot.‎ D. Could you buy me a bottle of aspirin,please?‎ E. It doesn’t hurt very much.‎ F. I can’t. I will play ping-pong with our teacher this afternoon.‎ G. Do you think it’s a good idea?‎ ‎【练习答案】‎ 一. 1.A 2.A 3.C 4.B 5.B 6.A 7.C 8.D 9.A 10.A 二.1.D 2.B 3.D 4.A 5.B 6.B 7.C 8.A 9.D 10.A 三. 1.C 2.F 3.A 4.D 5.B 专题17 完形填空 三种方法妙解中考英语“完形填空”‎ ‎ 著名美国心理学家布鲁姆把人们在认知领域中的教育目标分为六个层次，即记忆、理解、运用、分析、综合、评价。一般把前两个层次的试题称为知识型试题；后四个层次则称为能力型试题。目前广为流行的完形填空题，则是这两类题型的综合，是一种测试学生语言水平和实际运用语言能力的综合性题型。它可以培养学生的创造性思维能力并客观地反映学生的基本技能。完形填空题型复杂，涉及词类的搭配关系，词意的区别，语法结构，逻辑推理等各种知识，它要求学生必须具备一定的词汇量和一定的语法知识，而且还必须具备一定阅读理解能力，分析能力，逻辑推理能力，使完形后的文章不仅语法上准确，用词恰当，而且意思、结构无误。所以完形填空是学生感到困难，比较难把握的题型之一。‎ ‎ 为了能在完形填空中获得优异成绩，除了具备比较扎实的语言基础知识和一定的综合运用基础知识能力，还必须掌握一定的解题步骤和技巧。‎ ‎ 第一，快速通读全文，了解文章大意，注意语境和有关提示，不要急于选择答案。‎ ‎ 第二，在理解的基础上，边读边答题。答题时必须先易后难，先做最有把握、最熟悉的短语、惯用法、动词形式和语言结构的题目，在没有弄懂的情况下，切不可自行断意，逐步填意。‎ ‎ 第三，抓住文章的内在逻辑，从为什么对，为什么错着手。一篇文章是一个整体，有它独立的内容、结构与逻辑联系，不能单从局部的词义和语法来理解，应从全文内容出发，不断深入理解，得出符合逻辑和正确答案。‎ ‎ 第四，集中精力，解决难点。通过逻辑思维，上下文的内在含义和结构联系，排除明显错误，缩小选择范围，得出最佳答案。‎ ‎ 第五，选答完毕，再次通读全文，使语言流畅贯通，内容清晰，语意完整，情节发展合理。选择答案并非易事。答题时除了要遵循以上基本步骤外，还要始终从结构上、语法要求和内容上的逻辑要求考虑，切莫顾此失彼。下面就如何选择正确选项谈谈几种方法：‎ ‎ 一、固定搭配法 ‎ 在一篇文章中，有些选题是比较简单的，不需要多做分析，即可根据已学知识马上找出正确答案，例如：‎ ‎ ⑴my way home yestarday，I saw a dog in front ⑵ me.‎ ‎ （ ）⑴A. In ； B. Of ； C. On ； D. To；‎ ‎ （ ）（2）A. of ； B. to ； C. from； D. before；‎ ‎ 很容易知道on one’s way home 和in front of 都是固定搭配短语，因而可知答案分别是C和A.‎ ‎ 又如：The pen is worth .‎ ‎ A. buy； B. buying； C .to buy ； D. buys；‎ ‎ 在这个句子中，很明显答案是B，因为be worth 是一个习惯搭配，也就是说后面只能跟动名词，不跟不定式或其它成分，可见本题正确答案一下便可选出是B. ‎ 二、逐个排除法 ‎ 在一道选题中，一般有四个被选答案，有的是每个被选答案全似是而非，即使全文都领会了，叫我们一时选出正确答案也是有一定难度的，或是根本不可能的。在这种情况下，我们便可采用这个方法，名个击破，逐一否定，缩小选择范围，增大概率。当然，当我们最后确定了选项之后，还得将所选答案放入原句进行检验，验证是否准确无误。例如：‎ ‎ Neither Tom nor I to Beijing before.‎ ‎ A. has gone； B. have gone； C. has been； D. have been；‎ ‎ 根据所学知识，我们知道，以neither…nor结构做主谓时，句子谓语的数应与邻近主语取得一致，即本选题中应与主语I 一致，而I 是第一人称单数，故而要先选出含有have的选项B与D，而将A与C排除。又因为have（has ）gone to 意为“去…地方了”，即是人去了不在的这儿，显然选项B又不含题意。最后剩下的答案D就是要选出的正确答案。再将答案D放入检验，符合题意。‎ ‎ 三、逻辑判断法 ‎ 在个别选题中，其所提供的选项，有的从语法角度进行考虑是正确的，但若从语意上考虑，则会产生矛盾，不合逻辑，此时应着重分析，理解文章和句子语意，对语法无误的几个选项通过逻辑进行判断，甚至选出最完善的答案。如：‎ ‎ Li Ping has just come， so he has friends.‎ ‎ A. quite a few； B. few； C. much； D. little；‎ ‎ 很明显，答案C与D不能和后面的可数名词friends连用，故而首先排除。剩下的A、B答案，从语法上分析，均对，都没有犯任何语法错误。而从语意上分析，既然“李平刚刚来这儿”，按常理应“没几个朋友”才对，所以答案A在逻辑上不成立，剩下的B答案就是正确答案。但若将原句中的so改成but，则语意上又变成“虽然李平刚来这儿，但他有好多朋友”，故而答案应改为A.‎ ‎ 还有一选题，章从几个方面入手还不够，有时要从语态、时态、语序、语意、肯定和否定等诸要素，进行全面考虑，准确判断。如选择名词时，应联系文章主题及空格前后重复出现的词，注意它的数和性；选择动词时，不但要注意其所表示的意义及其惯用语法，而且要注意所给动词的时态、语态；选择连词时，要注意分析文章中前后句和上下文的逻辑关系；选择形容词、副词时，应注意词义区别及比较等级；选择代词时，应注意它的性、数、格是否准确；选择介词时，就要注意其固定搭配。‎ ‎ 总之，要提高完形填空的解题能力，除了掌握以上基本步骤和方法外，还必须增加实践量，不断总结经验，掌握技巧，提高解题的准确性，达到事半功倍的效果。‎ ‎【完形填空典型例题1】‎ Last year Tom left school. He came to Taipei to (1)______ a job. He went from one company to ‎ another but (2)_____ wanted him. Now he had little money. He had to go back to his small town. So he came to the station. He felt (3)______ and tired. It was very late at night and (4)_____ was full of people. They were waiting (5)_____ tickets of the last train. He bought the last ticket, and he was very happy.‎ ‎　　At that time, a woman with a crying baby walked to him. She asked him to sell her the ticket. He gave her the ticket. He thought they needed it (6)______ he did. After (7)______ left, he sat on the bench and didn't know (8)_____ to go. Just then, an old man came and said, “Young man, I (9)______ what you did to the woman. I have a big company. I need a good young man like (10)______. Would you like to work for me?”‎ ‎　( )1. A. find B. see C. look D. buy ‎　( )2. A. everyone B. no one C. nothing D. something ‎　　( )3. A. happy B. interesting C. sad D. glad ‎　　( )4. A. the city B. the company C. the farm D. the station ‎　　( )5. A. to buy B. to sell C. to give D. to pass ‎　　( )6. A. less than B. more than C. smaller than D. worse than ‎　　( )7. A. Tom B. the bus C. the train D. the old man ‎　　( )8. A. what B. which C. why D. where ‎　　( )9. A. have seen B. don't know C. don't like D. have done ‎　　( )10.A. the woman B. you C. the baby D. her ‎　　题解与分析：‎ ‎　　这是一篇记叙文，文章主要介绍了Tom从找不到工作到最后通过一个偶然的机会得到工作的情况。‎ ‎　　1.A. Tom到台北去是找工作的。‎ ‎　　2.B. 通过前半句“He went from one company to another”，可知他走了多家公司；中间的连词but做了一个转折，表明没有一家公司愿意录用他。‎ ‎　　3.C. 由于他没有找到工作，所以肯定会是很沮丧的。‎ ‎　　4.D. 根据上句“He came to the station.”可知答案。‎ ‎　　5.A. 在车站人们肯定是在等着买票的。‎ ‎　　6.C. Tom把自己的票给了那个女人，是因为Tom认为她比他更需要这张票，因为她还带着一个正在哭闹的孩子。‎ ‎　　7.C. 根据当时的情况，肯定是火车走了之后，Tom才坐在长凳上的。‎ ‎　　8.D. 根据所给词的词义可知答案。‎ ‎　　9.A. 只有那位老人看到当时的情景，他才会对Tom说这些话的。‎ ‎　　10.B. 因为这是老人和Tom之间的对话，所以他们互相之间应该称呼”你”才对。‎ ‎【完形填空典型例题2】‎ ‎“Where is the university?” This is a question that many visitors to Cambridge ask. But no one can give them a (1)______ answer, for there is no wall to be found (2)______ the university. The university is the city. You can find classroom buildings, (3)______ museums and offices of the university all over the city. And most of its members are the students and (4)_______ of the thirty-one colleges.‎ ‎　　Cambridge was already a (5)______ town long before the first students and teachers arrived 800 years ago. It grew up by the river Granta, and the river was once (6)______ the Cam. A (7)______ was built over the river as early as 875. So the town got its name “Cambridge”.‎ ‎　　In the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries more and more land was used for college buildings.‎ ‎ The town grew much (8)_______ in the nineteenth century after the opening of the railway in 1845. Cambridge became a (9)______ in 1951 and now it has a population of over 100,000. Many young students in other countries (10)______ to study at Cambridge. Thousands of people from all over the world come to visit the university town. It has become a famous place all around the world.‎ ‎( )1. A. true B. clear C. right D. real ‎( )2. A. around B. in C. near D. by ‎( )3. A. cinemas B. parks C. zoos D. libraries ‎( )4. A. parents B. farmers C. workers D. teachers ‎( )5. A. interesting B. usual C. developing D. common ‎( )6. A. said B. called C. spoken D. talked ‎( )7. A. bridge B. building C. station D. house ‎( )8. A. smaller B. slower C. faster D. cleaner ‎( )9. A. city B. college C. university D. country ‎( )10.A. stop B. hate C. hope D. need ‎　　题解与分析： ‎ ‎ 这是一篇说明文,文章主要介绍了剑桥大学城的规模和发展史。‎ ‎　　1.B. 由于剑桥大学的规模很大，因此谁也说不清它的具体位置。‎ ‎　　2.A. 按照常例，围墙应该建在学校的周围。‎ ‎　　3.D. 由于是学校，所以我们在里面见到的不会是很多的影院，动物园或公园。‎ ‎　　4.D. 在剑桥大学城里除了学生之外，其他更多的就是教师了。‎ ‎　　5.C. 从过去到现在，剑桥始终在发展前进。‎ ‎　　6.B. 河的名字是被人们所称呼的。‎ ‎　　7.A. 河的上面有一座桥。‎ ‎ 8.C. 根据“after the opening of the railway in 1845” 可知，自从铁路开通之后，剑桥的发展一定更快了。‎ ‎　　9.A. 随着剑桥规模的进一步扩大，它逐渐成了一座城了。‎ ‎　　10.C. 能到剑桥读书是很多人的愿望。‎ ‎【完形填空典型例题3】‎ A generation gap(代沟)has become a serious problem. I read a (1)_____ about it in the newspaper. Some children have killed themselves after quarrels with (2)_____. I think this is because they don't often have a talk with each other. Parents now (3)_____ more time in the office, (4)_____ they don't have much time to stay with their children. As time passes, they both feel that they don't have the (5)______ topics to talk about. I want to tell parents to be more with your (6)_____, get to know them and (7)______ them. And for children, show your (8)_______ to your parents. They are the people who love you. So (9)_____ them your thoughts. In this way, you (10)______ have a better understanding of each other.‎ ‎( )1. A. message B. call C. report D. letter ‎( )2. A. friends B. teachers C. classmates D. parents ‎( )3. A. spend B. stay C. work D. have ‎( )4. A. because B. if C. but D. so ‎( )5. A. interesting B. same C. true D. good ‎( )6. A. business B. children C. work D. office ‎( )7. A. get on with B. look after C. understand D. lave ‎( )8. A. interest B. secret C. trouble D. feelings ‎( )9. A. tell B. ask C. answer D. say ‎( )10.A. can B. should C. must D. would ‎　　题解与分析：‎ ‎ 这是一篇说明文，文章主要介绍了孩子与父母之间存在的代沟的问题。‎ ‎　　1.C. 在报纸上看到的应该是一篇报导。‎ ‎　　2.D. 综观全文，文章所谈论的是孩子与父母之间的代沟的问题。这从上下文可以看出。‎ ‎　　3.A. 现在很多家长都把时间花在了工作上，这是一个现存的事实。‎ ‎　　4.D. 前面谈到了原因，此处用so引出后面的结果。‎ ‎　　5.B. 由于家长与孩子在一起的时间很短，所以他们之间的共同语言越来越少。‎ ‎　　6.B. 这是作者的忠告，劝告家长们多与他们的孩子在一起。‎ ‎　　7.C. get to know 是“认识”，understand 就是“了解”了，这是一个循序渐进的过程。‎ ‎　　8.D. 做为孩子，根据作者的初衷，应该是将自己的感受告诉自己的父母。‎ ‎　　9.A. 想法应该是被告诉给家长的。‎ ‎　　10.A. 根据所给词语的词义可知答案。‎ 完形填空专项训练 ‎1‎ It’s never easy to admit you are in the wrong. We all__1____to know the art of apology. Think how often you’ve done wrong. Then count how many ____2___ you’ve expressed clearly you were ____3____ . You can’t go to bed with an easy mind if you do ___4____ about it. A doctor friend， Mr Lied， told me about a man who came to him with different kinds of signs： headaches， heart trouble and insomnia （失眠症）。 ____5____some careful exams， Mr Lied found nothing wrong with him and said， “If you don’t tell me what’s ____6______ you， I can’t help you.”The man admitted he was cheating （骗取）his brother of his inheritance （遗产 ）。 Then and there the clever doctor _____7_____ the man write to his brother and ____8_______ his money. As soon as the letter was put into the post box， the man suddenly cried. “Thank you，” he said to the doctor， “I think I’ve got well. ”An apology can not only save a broken relationship （关系）， but also make it ____9____ .If you can think of someone who should be ___10_______ an apology from you， do something about it right now.‎ ‎　1. A. decide B. have C. need D. try ‎　2. A. mistakes B. people C. ways D. times ‎　3. A. sorry B. weak C. sad D. wrong ‎　4. A. something B. anything C. nothing D. everything ‎　5. A. Before B. After C. Till D. Since ‎　6. A. hurting B. changing C. touching D. worrying ‎　7. A. made B. helped C. let D. saw ‎　8. A. gave B. kept C. returned D. paid ‎　9. A. newer B. worse C. harder D. stronger ‎　10. A. received B. give C. known D. forgotten ‎2‎ Mr White works in an office. He liked reading in bed when he was at school. It was bad for his ____1______ and now he has near sight . But he wouldn’t want _____2______to know about it and he never wears a pair of glasses. It often ______3____ him some trouble.One winter morning he was sent to a village school on business . He ____4_____a bus at a stop in a small ‎ town. Then he had to walk there. The road to the village wasn’t smooth . He fell over some times and it _____5_____his clothes dirty. _____6_____he got to the village. Suddenly it began to blow and it got colder. He was looking for the school while his _____7_____ was blown off. He began to run after it but he couldn’t get it. He couldn’t understand why his hat ran into a house as if it had _____8____. And he ran into the house,____9_______ .A woman stopped him and shouted angrily， “ ____10____ are you running after my hen （母鸡 ）for？”‎ ‎1. A. ears B. nose C. mouth D. eyes ‎2. A. anybody else B. nobody C. woman D. somebody ‎3. A. follows B. takes C. brings D. carries ‎4. A. took off B. got off C. got on D. came on ‎5. A. let B. made C. gave D. felt ‎6. A. At first B. At home C. At times D. At last ‎7. A. clothes B. bag C. hat D. glasses ‎8. A. legs B. hands C. shoes D. arms ‎9. A. always B. also C. either D. too ‎10. A. What B. Why C. Which D. Who ‎3‎ Miss Zhao is one of the most popular teachers in the school. Yesterday she came into the ___1____With a big smile on her face. She said to her ___2___ that she was ___3____ to see they did well in the sports meeting. But ___4____ was not pleased to see the classroom last Saturday not as____5____ as usual. She hoped they would clean the classroom every day.Wei Hua was on ___6_____ yesterday. She said everyone was at .___7__ except Lin Tao. Then she told Miss Zhao about their ____8____ to the Great Wall last Sunday. Luckily the weather was _____9____ . They played games and had a picnic there. After Wei Hua ___10____ her talk， Miss Zhao began her lesson.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎　　1. A. shop B. classroom C. park D. office ‎　　2. A. students B. teachers C. workers D. doctors ‎　　3. A. angry B. sorry C. glad D. sad ‎　　4. A. she B. I C. we D. he ‎　　5.A.dark B. old C. large D. clean ‎　　6. A. time B. duty C. foot D. to ‎　　7. A. home B. noon C. night D. school ‎　　8. A. visit B. music C. clock D. football ‎　　9. A. bad B. fine C. rainy D. windy ‎　　10. A. started B. had C. finished D. gave ‎ ‎ ‎4‎ There were no classes that afternoon， so Henry went to a __1__ shop near his home. The shop sold many jackets. He looked __2__ them and at last chose a very nice one. He __3__ it on and then told the shopkeeper to put it into a __4__. At that time his friend Bruce came into the shop. They hadn’t seen each other for a long time. They were so __5__ to meet again that they forgot __6__ else. Soon they were busy talking on and on happily.It was nearly six o’clock， __7__ they decided to go and have dinner together. Henry picked up the bag， and walked __8__ the door of the shop. The shopkeeper stopped them and asked Henry to pay for the __9__. Henry looked at him in surprise at first， but soon he remember that he hadn’t paid for it. He said __10__ ，gave him the money and them left the shop with his friend.‎ ‎　　1. A. fruit B. book C. food D. clothing ‎　　2. A. up B. for C. after D. at ‎　　3. A. put B. tried C. got D. turned ‎　　4. A. bag B. cup C. car D. pocket ‎　　5. A. worried B. interested C. pleased D. anxious ‎　　6. A. nobody B. anybody C. something D. everything ‎　　7. A. though B. so C. because D. but ‎　　8. A. towards B. through C. out of D. round ‎　　9. A. dinner B. bag C. jacket D. ticket ‎　　10. A. goodbye B. yes C. hello D. sorry ‎ ‎ ‎5‎ Sam had a dog， Its name was Tod. it was very helpful， but it ate too much . So he didn’t like it. he wanted to __1__ Tod. He __2__ Tod and put it in a small boat . he rowed（划）the boat to the __3__ of a big river. Just as he __4__ the poor animal into the river， the boat began to go down. __5__ the man and Tod __6__ into the river. Tod was able to swim， __7__ Sam couldn’t. The dog bit the rope and broke it . it tried its best to swim to __8__ Sam. The man was saved， so he was very thankful to the dog， he didn’t want to kill the dog __9__. From then on， he gave the dog as __10__ as it wanted.‎ ‎　　1. A. sell B. buy C. beat D. kill ‎　　2. A. tied B. pulled C. pushed D. closed ‎　　3. A. front B. foot C. side D. middle ‎　　4. A. threw B. carried C. sent D. brought ‎　　5. A. Neither B. Nor C. Each D. Both ‎　　6. A. fell B. dropped C. lost D. jumped ‎　　7. A. because B. though C. but D. when ‎　　8. A. kill B. save C. meet D. hit ‎　　9. A. no more B. any more C. no longer D. not more ‎　　10. A. little B. few C. many D. much Key： 1.C 2.D 3.A 4.C 5.B 6.D 7.A 8.C 9.D 10.B Key： 1. D 2. A 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. D 7. C 8. A 9. D 10. A Key： 1. B 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. D 6. B 7. D 8. A 9.B 10.C Key： 1. D 2. B 3. B 4. A 5. C 6. D 7. B 8. A 9. C 10. D Key： 1. D 2. A 3. D 4. A 5. D 6. A 7. C 8. B 9. b 10. D ‎6‎ ‎　　Martin Henfield talks about some of his experiences (经历) as a twin:When we were small my mother dressed us ____1___ the same clothes. That was bad enough and we didn’t like it. But when we went on our first camping (野营) trip with the scouts (童子军), it was even ____2____. We were only ten years old, and while ___3___ went into their sleeping bags for the night, we were not happy to snuggle (紧偎) inside a double sleeping bag my mother made for us.‎ ‎　　At school our classmates ____4____ us Henfield One and Henfield Two, so people couldn’t even see our difference according to (根据) our initials (姓名的开头字母) because _____5__ of us were M. O. It was only when I went to college and began to have my own friends that I started to feel my own freedom of identity (身份).‎ ‎　　Before I went to college (大学), during my last secondary school ____6____, I got a job on a building site (地点). My twin brother, Mike Henfield, didn’t work. He was resting. One day I said to the foreman (工头), “Can I have a week off?” “Certainly,” he said, “but you won’t have the job when you ____7____ back.” I didn’t want to ___8___ the job. So on Monday morning, Mike went down in my jeans (牛仔裤), jacket and hat and he worked for me for one week. ____9____ of them knew the difference.‎ ‎　　Now I am growing old and I feel very different ___10__ my twin brother. And he’ll tell you the same. We have really worked towards that for forty years.‎ ‎　　1.A. in B. for C. on D. with ‎ ‎　　2.A. bad B. worse C. good D. best ‎　　3.A. all boys B. another boy C. all the other boys D. all the boys ‎　 4.A called B. asked C. to D. knew　‎ ‎　　5.A every B. each C. both D. all ‎　　6.A. holidays B. holiday C. week D. weekend ‎　　7.A. get B. will get C. got D. are getting ‎　　8.A. loose B. lost C. missing D. lose ‎　　9.A. All B. None C. Each D. Both ‎　　10.A. in B. from C. with D. as ‎7‎ When the Americans were getting ready to send their first man to the moon, an old Irishman (爱尔兰人) was watching them on the television in the bar of a hotel. There was an Englishman in the bar, too, and he ___11____ the Irishman, “The ____12___ are very clever, aren’t they? They are going ___13____ some men to the moon. It is a long ____14___ from the world.”‎ ‎　　“Oh, that’s ____15___,” the Irishman answered quickly. “The Irish are going to send some men to the sun in a few months. That’s ____16___ away from the moon, you know.”‎ ‎　　“Yes, it is.” The English man said, “___17___ it is too ___18__ for the people to go to.”‎ ‎　　The Irishman laughed and said, “Well, the Irish aren’t stupid, you know, we ____19___ go to the sun during the day, of course, we will go there ___20____.”‎ ‎　　11.A. said to B. told C. talk to D. spoke to ‎　　12.A. Englishmen B. Americans C. Irish D. Frenchmen ‎　　13.A. to reach B. to send C. to give D. to rest ‎　　14.A. time B. street C. road D. way ‎　　15.A. Good B. Nice C. true D. nothing ‎　　16.A. long B. far C. farther D. much farther ‎　 17.A. and B. but C. or D. because ‎　　18.Aa. hot B. warm C. cold D. cool ‎　　19.A. don’t B. can’t C. won’t D. mustn’t ‎　　20.A. in the morning B. in the afternoon C. in the evening D. during the night 答案：‎ ‎　　1.A 　　2.B 　 3.C 　 4.A 　5.C　　 6.B 　7.A 　 8.D　 9.B 　10.B ‎11.A 　12.B 　13.B 　14.D 　15.D 　16.D　17.Bb 　18.A 　19.C 　20.D 专题18 阅读理解 做阅读理解的五点注意 一、五点注意 注意一：试题各小题所提供的四个备选项，有的是语法、结构上有错误，有的是与短文意思不相符。解题时要把有结构、语法错误的先排除，再考虑是否符合短文内容。‎ 注意二：对短文中的生词或看不懂的句子，应大胆根据构词法及上、下文意思进行猜测，尤其对涉及文中某个词或某个句子含义的选择试题，要根据文章所阐述的主要内容及上、下文内在逻辑关系，大胆分析推断，去伪存真选出正确答案。‎ 注意三：对于涉及文章主旨、大意、作者意图及短文标题等选择试题，虽然短文中没有直接说明，可统观全文，通过短文所提供的材料或联想短文材料以外的常识，如结合已学过的自然、社会科学知识加以综合理解、分析推测或按作者的思路进行推理，从而且推断出正确答案。‎ 注意四：做选择试题时一般先做在文中能直接找到依据的细节题，后做主旨题、推理题。这样在对语篇有更多领悟的基础上再进行推理判断和概括总结，把握性就更大。‎ 注意五：阅读的顺序一般是先读短文，再看题目，然后逐题作答。若文章较长，也可以先将测试题目通览一遍，然后带着问题阅读文章。这样对与答题有关的段落、句子反应敏感，而对其他与答题无关的部分可以不必花费太多时间，阅读速度就可加快些。 ‎ ‎ 二、实例分析（共五篇，答案均有解析）‎ ‎(A)‎ Henry was an office worker in a big city. He worked very hard and enjoyed traveling in his holidays. ‎ He usually went to the seaside, but one year he saw an advertisement in a newspaper. “Enjoy country life. Spend a few weeks at West Hill Farm. Good food. Fresh air. Horse riding. Walking. Fishing. Cheap and interesting.”‎ ‎“This sounds a good idea,” he thought. “I’ll spend a month at West Hill Farm. I think I can enjoy horse riding, walking and fishing. They’ll make a change from sitting by the seaside and swimming.”‎ He wrote to the farmer. In the letter he said that he would like to spend all of July there. Then on the first of July, he left for West Hill Farm. ‎ But four days later, he returned home. ‎ ‎“What was wrong with West Hill Farm?” his best friend, Ed, asked him. “Didn’t you enjoy country life?”‎ ‎“Country life was very good,” Henry said. “But there was another problem.”‎ ‎“Oh. What?”‎ ‎“Well,” he said, “the first day I was there a sheep died, and we had roast mutton for dinner.”‎ ‎“What’s wrong with that?” Ed asked. “Fresh meat is the best.”‎ ‎“I know, but on the second day a cow died, and we had roast beef for dinner.”‎ ‎“Lucky you!”‎ ‎“You don’t understand,” Henry said. “on the third day a pig died and we had roast pork for dinner.”‎ ‎“A different meat every day,” Ed said loudly, “and you are complaining!”‎ ‎“Let me finish,” Henry said. “on the fourth day the farmer died, and I didn’t dare (敢)stay for dinner!”‎ ‎1. How did Henry find out about the farm?‎ A. He saw it in a newspaper advertisement. B. His best friend told him. ‎ C. He wrote to the farmer. D. Maybe he learned it from the radio. ‎ ‎2. Henry came back home several days later because ______________. ‎ A. he didn’t like the country life at all B. the farmer wasn’t friendly to him C. his holiday was over D. he thought he might have to eat the farmer ‎3. “…and you are complaining!”, the word “complain” means __________. ‎ A. 夸奖 B. 说三道四 C. 抱怨 D. 故弄玄虚 ‎4. Which of the following sentences is true?‎ A. Ed could eat a different kind of meat every day. B. Henry thought he could enjoy a change. ‎ C. Henry couldn’t think of anything else to do, so he went to the farm. ‎ D. The farmer died because of the bad meat he ate. ‎ ‎5. Which is the best title for the passage?‎ A. What a beautiful farm! B. Have a good time. ‎ C. A short holiday D. Henry and the farmer. ‎ ‎(B)‎ Paragraph 1‎ Scientists have learned a lot about the kinds of people need. They say that there are several kinds of food that people should eat every day, they are: (1) green and yellow vegetables of all kinds; (2) citrus (柑桔) fruits and tomatoes; (3) potatoes and other fruits and vegetables; 94) meat of all kinds, fish and eggs; (5) milk and foods made from milk; (6) bread or cereal (谷类), rice is also in this kind of food; (7) butter, or something like butter. ‎ Paragraph 2‎ People in different countries and different places of the world eat different kinds of things. Foods are cooked and eaten in many different kinds of ways. People in different countries eat at different times of the day. In some places people eat once or twice a day; in other countries people eat three or four times a day. Scientists say that none of the differences is really important. It doesn’t matter whether foods are eaten raw or cooked, canned (罐装的) or frozen (冷冻的). It doesn’t matter if a person eats dinner at 4 o’clock in the afternoon or at eleven o’clock at night. The important thing is what you eat every day. ‎ Paragraph 3‎ There are two problems, then, in feeding the large number of people on the earth. The first is to find some way to feed the world’s population so that no one is hungry. The second is to make sure that people everywhere have the right kinds of food to make them grow to be strong and healthy. ‎ ‎6. According to(依据)the scientists，which of the following groups of food is the healthiest for your lunch？‎ A. Chicken, apples, cereal and cabbages. B. Potatoes, carrots, rice and bread. ‎ C. Oranges, bananas, fish and tomatoes. D. Beef, pork, fish and milk,‎ ‎7. It is important for people to eat ______. ‎ A. three times a day B. dinner at twelve o’clock ‎ C. cooked food all the time D. something from each of the seven kinds of food every day ‎ ‎8. People in different countries and different places of the world ________. ‎ A. have the right kinds of food to eat B. cook their food in the same way ‎ C. have their meals at the same time D. eat food in different ways ‎ ‎9. Which of the following is not true？‎ A. People in some places don’t have enough to eat. B. There are too many people in the world. ‎ C. One of the problems is that no one is hungry. ‎ D. The scientists are trying to make people grow to be strong and healthy. ‎ ‎10. If there is Paragraph (段落) 4, what do you think is going to be talked about？‎ A. When people eat their lunch. B. What to do with the two problems. ‎ C. How to cook food in different ways. D. Why people eat different kinds of food. ‎ ‎(C)‎ People often say, “Children can’t do math problem, it’s because parents can’t do their children’s homework.” Here’s an example to show what I mean. ‎ The other day my daughter brought home her math homework. “I have to subtract (减) 179 from ‎ 202,” she said. ‎ ‎“It’s quite easy,” I said. “You put the 202 over the 179.”‎ ‎“But we need a 10 here. Where is the 10?”‎ ‎“I don’t know where the 10 is. Let’s just subtract 179 from 202. Nine from two is three. You carry one and add it to seven. Eight from zero is two. The answer is 23.”‎ ‎“We can’t do it that way. We have to use the 10.”‎ ‎“Well, I’m going to call your teacher to see how she subtracts 179 from 202.”‎ Over the telephone, I said that I was having a bit of trouble with the homework she had given to my daughter. The teacher said, “In the right-hand column (栏) we have units of one. The two in that column counts for two ones. The zero in the center counts for zero tens. The two in the left-hand column counts for hundreds. Are you clear?” But I didn’t think I was clear. ‎ I hung up and found my way to the medicine box. My head was now hurting. I started putting pills of medicine into my mouth. “How many did you take?” my wife asked. “I took one and then I took another…I know one and one was two, but don’t ask me what it is now.”‎ ‎11. The daughter wanted ______ the other day. ‎ A. to give her father a lesson B. to show how difficult math was ‎ C. her father to phone her teacher D. her father to help her with her homework ‎ ‎12. Which of the following sentences is not true?‎ A. The father had a different way to do the math problem. ‎ B. The father couldn’t do his daughter’s homework. ‎ C. The daughter couldn’t understand her father’s way. ‎ D. The daughter had some trouble doing the math problem. ‎ ‎13. From what the teacher said, we know that the word “units” means ______ here. ‎ A. whole numbers less than 10 B. whole things ‎ C. groups of lessons D. the smallest numbers ‎14. What the teacher said made the father _________. ‎ A. angry B. worried C. sad D. tired ‎15. Can you guess what would happen next in the story?‎ A. The father would go to school and begin to learn math. ‎ B. The father would become very ill and have to take more medicine. ‎ C. The father would never do his daughter’s math problems again. ‎ D. The father would go to the school and fight with the teacher. ‎ ‎【答案与解析】‎ ‎(A) 假日里，亨利喜欢到海边去旅游。有一次，他想去西山农场享受一下田园风光，并计划在那儿度过一个月的时间。可是令人惊奇的是，才去四天之后他就回来了。当朋友问起其中的缘由时，亨利说道：第一天，农场里死了一只羊，晚餐时美美地吃了一顿烤羊肉；第二天农场死了一头牛，又吃了一顿烧牛肉；第三天农场死了一头猪，结果又吃了一顿烤猪肉。可是，到了第四天，农场主死了，我不敢再留下来吃饭了。‎ ‎1. A。第二段的首句“...but one year he saw an advertisement in a newspaper.”即是答案的出处。‎ ‎2.‎ ‎ D。本题考查根据语境进行分析判断的能力。由上下文，显然可知这是报纸上的一则广告信息。‎ ‎3. C。本题考查通过上下文对词汇的推测能力。根据亨利的叙述可得出此答案。‎ ‎4. B。这由“A different meat every day, and you are complaining!”一句可知。‎ ‎5. C。本来打算要在乡村农场过一个暑假，结果四天之后就回来了。这能不是个短暂的假期吗？用此作标题既切合题意，又具有幽默的味道。‎ ‎(B) 这篇短文分为三个落：第一段列举了科学家研究了人们每天要吃的食物；第二段讲述了不同国家的人们饮食习惯和饮食结构等各方面有很大差异。但这些对人来说都没不是很重要的，重要的是每天吃什么。第三段阐述了两个问题：如何解决世界人口的吃饭问题，既要吃饱，又要吃得健康。‎ ‎6. A。本题属表层理解题。由第一段科学家建议七大类食品可知答案非A莫属。‎ ‎7. D。由“The important thing is what you eat every day.”及第一段的内容可知D是正确答案。而根据第二段可知A、B、C皆为错误的。‎ ‎8. D。第二段开头的“People in different countries and different places of the world eat different kinds of things. Foods are cooked and eaten in many different kinds of ways.”这两句是解答本题的关键。‎ ‎9. C。根据第三段所讲的内容，C项显然是错误的。‎ ‎10. B。A、C和D都是在上文刚刚谈论过的，又根据第三段“There are two problems, then, in feeding the large number of people on the earth.”所提的两个问题，可以推知下文可能要谈论如何解决这两个问题。故答案为B。‎ ‎(C) 作者向我们讲述了很多人都可能遇到的一个问题：父母往往回答不上来小孩子问的一些非常简单的数学问题。文中作者的女儿向他询问怎样计算202减去179这道题。结果，他的女儿不但弄不懂他的解释，而且他还无法解释清楚女儿提出的问题。他只好向女儿的老师求助，而自己被老师的解释搞得天昏脑胀……‎ ‎11. D。细读第二段，再联系父女俩的谈话即可得出答案。‎ ‎12. B。根据“but I didn’t think I was clear.”以及“I took one and then I took another…I know one and one was two, but don’t ask me what it is now.”可知B项是错误的。‎ ‎13. A。根据短文内容，那位老师所说的“”她的意思是说“个位上的数字是几就表示几个一”，当然应是小于1的数。‎ ‎14. D。由“My head was now hurting.”这句话，可知“父亲”听了老师的解释后没有生气、焦虑或悲伤，而是头昏脑胀，疲惫之至。‎ ‎15. C。选项A是不现实的，而选项C、D更是荒诞离奇。体会一下文末一段“父亲”的举动，就可以想起他是一种什么样的心情。‎ 初中英语阅读训练的六种方法 ‎1. 讲究阅读方法 ‎(1)依据主题句定短文的中心：任意一篇文章通常是围绕一个中心展开并且由段落组成的；段落之间有着内在的紧密联系，而表达段落主题的句子叫主题句，通常置于段落的开头，有时在段落末尾和中间；其它的句子是用来说明和阐述主题句的；若把一个个主题句加以整理，你能悟出其中心思想，同时还可以回避、排除个别生词、难句（等困难信号）所带来的干扰，但也有一些文章的中心思想常贯穿在全文中，因而要综观全文，对全文有一个透彻的理解才行。‎ 如： ‎ My friend Matt and I arrived at the Activity Centre on Friday evening. The accommodation wasn’t wonderful, but we had everything we needed (beds, blankets, food ), and we were pleased to be out of the city and in the fresh air. ‎ On Saturday morning we met the other ten members of our group. Cameron had come along with two friends, Kevin and Simon, while sisters Carole and Lynn had come with Amanda. There were some other members I didn’t know. We had come from different places and none of us knew the area. ‎ We knew we were going to spend the weekend outdoors, but none of us was sure exactly how. Half of us spent the morning caving while the others went rock-climbing and then we changed at lunchtime. Matt and I went to the caves (岩洞) first. Climbing out was harder than going in, but after a good deal of pushing, we were out at last. Though we were covered with mud, we were pleased and excited by what we’d done. ‎ This passage mainly talks about ______________. ‎ A. the writer’s friends at the Activity Center B. the writer’s experience at the Activity Center ‎ C. outdoor sports at the Activity Center D. how to go rock-climbing and caving ‎ ‎[参考答案B] 上述这段短文的中心是说明“the writer’s experience at the Activity Center.”。作者以及作者的朋友，还有组上的其他一些成员一起在活动中心度周末的一些活动以及感受。‎ ‎(2) 掌握具体事实和重要细节：阅读文章时，要求学生养成辨认和记忆具体事实、重要细节的习惯。因为具体事实、重要细节是主题句的扩展、补充、说明或例证，是用来支持和说明中心思想的，而且是阅读理解测试的重要组成部分。‎ 如：If someone asks me: “Do you like music?” I’m sure I will answer him or her: “Of course, I do.” because I think music is an important part of our lives. ‎ Different people have different ideas about music. For me, I like rock music because it’s so exciting. And my favorite rock band, the “Foxy Ladies” (酷妹) is one of the most famous rock bands in the world. I also like pop music. My classmate LiLan loves dance music, because she enjoys dancing. My best friend, Jane, likes jazz music (爵士乐). She thinks jazz is really cool. ‎ ‎“I like dance music and rock very much.” says my brother, “because they are amazing.” ‎ But my mother thinks rock is boring. “I like some relaxing (轻松的) music,” she says. That’s why she likes country music, I think. ‎ ‎①The writer likes music because he thinks ____________. ‎ A. it’s an exciting part of our lives B. it’s an amazing part of our lives ‎ C. it’s an important part of our lives ‎ ‎②What kind of music does the writer like? ‎ A. Rock and pop music. B. Rock and dance music. C. Jazz and country music. ‎ ‎③Who likes dancing? ‎ A. The writer. B. Li Lan. C. Jane. ‎ ‎④The writer’s mother thinks that country music is __________. ‎ A. amazing B. boring C. relaxing ‎⑤ How many people’s ideas about music are talked about in this passage (短文)?‎ A. 4. B. 5. C. 6.‎ 这是几道重要事实和细节的辨认题，全是围绕短文的主题句“Different people have different ideas about music”来展开说明的，起补充举例作用。答案分别为 ① C ② A ③ B ④ C ⑤ B。 ‎ ‎(3) 运用构词法、语境线索等帮助来推测关键词义：在阅读文章的过程中，常常会遇到一些生词，如果不懂得这些词义就会妨碍理解，但大部分生词的词义是可以根据上下文，结合构词法、借助文章中的语境线索帮助在理解基础上猜测其词义，这有助于加快阅读速度，提高阅读理解能力。如：‎ Water is all around us. Water is in the ocean. Water is in the lakes and rivers. Water is in the air. There is more water than land on the earth. All living things must have it. We must have it, too. We cannot live without drinking water. Sometimes, we do not have all the water that we need. The land will dry up without water. Sometimes, there can be too much water in the land. If it rains very, very hard, the rain water will run down the hill. It takes some of the land with it when it runs down the hills. It is called erosion when the water takes the land away.‎ ‎“Erosion” in the passage means ____________.‎ A. 地震 B. 雪崩 C. 侵蚀 D. 霜冻 ‎ 根据前面的语句If it rains very, very hard, the rain water will run down the hills. It takes some of the land with it when it runs down the hills.解释可以推知erosion是一种自然地理现象，即“侵蚀”，答案为C。‎ ‎2. 训练阅读速度 在阅读中，我们或多或少会碰到一些生词和不熟悉的短语，这些生词和短语会妨碍我们对文章中心的理解，但我们总是查阅词典也会影响阅读的速度。为了不查词典又能破解生词词义，并理解好文章的中心，要求考生根据构词法判断词义。如：This material is unreadable.中 unreadable是生词。学生可以根据词根 read ，知道 un和 able分别为前缀和后缀，那么 unreadable的意义就不难猜测了；还可以培养学生根据生词与上下文的关系来猜测其意义。生词所在的句子、段落会提供很多的暗示和线索，依据这些暗示和线索就可以理解生词的词义了。如：同义词反义词线索；解释性线索；例证性线索；标点符号线索等。如：‎ A. The herdsman, who looks after sheep, earns about 650 yuan a year.‎ 定语从句中的 looks after sheep 就解释了 herdsman的词义为“牧人”。‎ B. Like her younger sister who is gregarious, Alice also likes to make friends.句首的 like（像）这个语境线索说明：句中的gregarious与 likes to make friends意义相近。‎ 通过这些方式可以帮助学生加快阅读速度，进一步提高阅读正确率。‎ ‎3. 改进阅读方式 ‎（1）预测：培养学生依据文章标题（副标题）、插图以及相关的背景知识和社会生活经验，对文章的大致内容预测以及可能涉及到的词汇，然后阅读文章的第一段，并对自己的预测进行验证、纠正，同时抓住主题句、关键词，从而更好地从整体上去理解和把握文章的中心。‎ ‎（2）略读：指导学生快速浏览全文，领会文章大意，辨析文体，掌握篇章结构，进而抓住文章的中心。‎ ‎3）查读：指导学生在浏览全文的基础上进行查读，以回答个别事实细节性的问题。有些细节性的问题不能直接在短文中找到答案，必须进行必要的综合、归纳、转换才能获得，也就是要在直接可获得的事实和细节的基础上经过综合、归纳、转换间接地获得所需要的事实和细节。它通常涉及数据、时间、人称、代词的指代、动作的行为的关联、动作行为者与承受者、地点和空间、表态方式、因果、条件、内涵与外延等。如： ‎ One day Mrs Wison went shopping with Tracy and Ben. They went to the supermarket in the new shopping center. ‎ ‎“Why do you buy things here?” Tracy wanted to know. “Because they are cheaper here than at the corner store near our home,” Mrs. Wilson said. “Help me check the prices, please.” ‎ The Wilsons were not rich and Mrs. Wilson was always careful with her money. She looked carefully at the prices of things. She bought lots of things in the supermarket. When they got home, the children said, “We don’t think you saved money by going to the supermarket.” “Of course I did,” Mrs. Wilson said “Everything was cheaper there.” ‎ ‎“We know,” the children said, “but we came home by taxi because we had too much to carry. The taxi fare was more than the money that you saved !” ‎ Mrs Wilson added everything up. Her children were right.‎ ‎“Well done,” she said. “Next time we’ll do the shopping nearby.” ‎ ‎①The things at the corner store were ____ than those in the supermarket.‎ A. cheaper B. nicer C. more expensive D. Better ‎ ‎② Mrs. Wilson _________ in the end. ‎ A. spent more money B. paid less money ‎ C. lost some money D. saved a little money ‎ 这两个问题都是细节性问题，但又不能直接从文章中得出答案，要经过分析和计算间接地获得事实细节。①选C。由 Mrs. Wilson 的话“Because they are cheaper here than at the corner store near our home. ”分析可知the things at the corner store were more expensive.②选A。 Mrs. Wilson 在超级市场买的东西是便宜的，但返回时由于东西多结果打的士回家将打的士的费用摊进去就高于节省的费用了，因此可以知道：Mrs. Wilson spent more money in the end.‎ ‎4. 扩大英语阅读量 目前初中英语教科书所提供的阅读量较以前有较大幅度的增加，在题材、体裁的选取，功能与话题的设计方面均注意到多样化和广泛性；内容贴近学生实际，教师可以立足教材阅读材料指导和训练学生阅读方法与技巧，教学语言知识和指导学生掌握句法、语法，扩大词汇量，培养阅读兴趣，帮助学生奠定一定的英语阅读能力。但教材中的阅读量离大纲和课标要求的阅读量远远不够。课标五级阅读要求规定：除教材外，课外阅读量应 达到15万字以上。因此教师要督促学生精读泛读结合，通过广泛的阅读不仅有利于学生扩大词汇量，丰富语言知识、开阔视野，开拓思路，还有利于了解英美等国的文化背景、生活风俗、思维习惯及英语特有的语言表达方式，从而提高阅读理解能力。‎ 泛读时，要求学生对阅读材料中的各种语言现象不作全面精细认真的分析，而是根据已掌握的语言知识尽快地获取所需要的信息。‎ ‎5. 强化阅读训练 ‎(1) 指定阅读范围：教师按学生的英语水平将其分成不同的组别，选择与之相适应的英语读物（配有一定量的问题），分别规定阅读的范围，要求他们课外自行安排时间，带着问题快速阅读，并规定一个较宽松的期限进行检查。‎ ‎(2) 进行阅读指导：对学生阅读过程中遇到的疑难，教师要及时答疑辅导，以帮助学生顺利阅读。但要注意从学法上多加以指导，帮助和引导他们自行分析和解决问题。‎ ‎(3) 检查阅读效果：到了规定的阅读期限教师可以通过口头练习和笔试结合的方式分组检查学生阅读任务完成的情况。口头练习以学生回答有关问题、讲述阅读文章的心得为主；笔试检查要求学生完成正误判断题，选择题，填空题等。‎ ‎(4) 展示阅读效果：利用英语课外活动，通过开展书评、辩论会、演讲会等活动来展示不同组学生课外泛读的成果。分A、B组评论读物；讨论读物的人物特征、主要情节等，让学生在宽松的氛围中各抒己见，互相交流，从而促进学生阅读时积极思考，认真阅读，同时加深对读物的理解，培养表达能力。‎ ‎6. 加强评估指导 通过评估测试可以检测学生阅读理解实际能力与水平，可以摸清学生的强项与不足，从而为进一步培养学生阅读能力提供依据。教师要充分发挥阅读测试的指挥棒作用。阅读测试文章选材要广泛多样，篇幅要恰当，难易要适中，从而确保阅读测试的信度和效度；在题型设计上做到主观性题型和客观性题型兼顾，并针对学生平时阅读中反映出来的重点、难点与疑点，避免题型过于单一以及偏题、怪题现象，更不能片面追求试题难度。客观性测试题要能通过阅读文章直接找到答案；主观性测试题要能在阅读短文后通过上下文，运用联想、比较、归纳、分析判断文章的隐含意义。测试后要认真进行分析和总结，做到发现问题及时解决，以便进一步提高。 ‎ ‎ ‎ 阅读理解专项训练 第一组：‎ ‎(1)‎ There is a bar （酒吧）in our town with the name “The White Horse”. It is Mr. Webster’s. Few people went to the bar last year, but things are quite different now.‎ There was a picture of a white horse on the door of the bar. Then a stranger came in one day, drank something, looked around the bar, and then said to Mr. Webster, “Few people come here. Take down the picture of the white horse and put a picture of a black horse instead. ”‎ ‎“But the name of the bar is ‘The White Horse’. ”Mr. Webster said.‎ ‎“Yes, but do it. ”the man said. Then he went out of the bar Mr. Webster went to an artist and said, “I want a picture of a black horse. ”‎ The next day a picture of a black horse was on the door of the bar instead of that of the white horse. Soon after the door opened, a man came in and said, “There’s a mistake on the door of your bar, and the picture is different from the name. ”The man looked, sat down and drank something.‎ Then another man came in and said the same, and then another and another. A lot of people came in and said, “The picture on your door is wrong. ”and they all stopped and drank in Mr. Webster’s bar.‎ ‎（ ）1. The stranger told Mr. Webster to take down the picture of the white horse because he knew ______.‎ A. a picture of a black horse showed good luck B. the picture of the white horse wasn’t good for the bar C. people would understand the picture different from the name D. people would come in and tell the picture was different from the name ‎（ ） 2. Mr. Webster agreed with the stranger _______.‎ A. though he wasn’t ready to do it like that at first B. though he didn’t like the black horse C. because he knew he was an artist D. because he also wanted to change the picture ‎（ ）3. More and more people came to the bar because _______.‎ A. it had changed its name B. the black horse was better than the white one C. the bar had a black horse D. they wanted to show the mistake ‎（ ）4. The stranger _______.‎ A. was cleverer than Mr. Webster B. didn’t like the white horse at the beginning C. knew Mr. Webster and the artist D. got much money by teaching Mr. Webster ‎（ ）5. From the story we have learnt that _______.‎ A. if your business is not good, you’d better change the name or the picture B. if you are in trouble, you should take others’ ideas C. when you have difficulty, don’t give up D. when a good name is given, it can cause success ‎(2 )‎ A four-year-old girl is lying in the arms of a doctor. She has just lost her mother. Her pink clothes are full of blood and her eyes look at something only she can see.‎ Every day we see pictures like this on our televisions. We see Iraqi （伊拉克的）children begging for food and water from American and British soldiers as they move through towns and cities towards the capital, Baghdad（巴格达）. We see these children following parents, carrying bags of almost the same size as their small bodies as they escape from their homes in Baghdad.‎ They show just some of the young lives that have been turned upside down by ongoing war and the terrible price paid by Iraqi children.‎ ‎“Dad, why are the Americans fighting against us? Are we going to be killed? ”asks the son of Abu Singar, an Iraqi engineer. Abu finds it hard to explain this war to his eight-year-old son.‎ He tries to make him feel safe by saying, “The bombs（炸弹）are far away from us. The Americans are fighting the soldiers. We’re going to be all right. ”Even though Abu knows it isn’t always true, little else can be done. In Baghdad, parents give their children sleeping pills to try and let them escape from the sound of bombs. And all the schools are closed.‎ Not things are worse, and the ongoing war makes it impossible to count the number who are hungry, sick, hurt or even dead.‎ ‎（ ）6. What happens to the children in Iraq because of the war?‎ A. The children will get better than before.‎ B. The children beg for food and water from American and British soldiers.‎ C. The children in Iraq go away from their homes in Baghdad.‎ D. The children live a most terrible life.‎ ‎（ ）7. What does the word “ongoing”mean in Chinese? ______.‎ A. 正在进行的 B. 非正义的 C. 未授权的 D. 影响恶劣的 ‎（ ）8. The father doesn’t tell the true thing to his child because ______.‎ A. he wants to make his child not feel dangerous B. he and his child are afraid to lose each other in the war C. he doesn’t want his child to believe American soldiers D. he will lose his country and his home ‎（ ）9. The war in Iraq tells us that ________.‎ A. the Iraqi people in the war are much hungrier and worse B. we should help the Iraqi people build their country again C. nothing can be done except fighting D. both A and B ‎（ ）10. What would be the best title （标题）for the report?‎ A. Iraqi Children during the War B. Sickness, Death in Iraqi C. America and England Fight against Iraq D. A Girl in the War in Iraq ‎(3 )‎ The Guidance Department （教导处）at Berryville High School has a staff （员工）of eleven teachers. Most of their work is done with the students. But the staff sees a lot of parents, too.‎ ‎“Parents meetings make clear monthly diagram （图表）. ”says Mildred Freman, head of the Guidance. “This diagram stays much the same from year to year. The busy months are October, March and May. ”‎ September, the beginning of a new school year, starts rather slowly. Few parents come in. Most of these want to talk about the schedules （日程安排）. October brings many problems caused by some students. Some parents are called in. Others come by themselves. Things quiet down in November. December is a quiet month. “It’s the holiday. ”Ms Foreman says, “People want to come in, I know, but they decide to wait until after New Year’s Day. ”‎ Report cards go home just before Christmas holidays. Bad marks （分数）bring parents in as school opens again. This happens again in March, another report card month. May is always the year’s busiest month. That’s when parents begin to think that their children may be asked to stay in the same grade again. They come in to see if anything can be done before things are decided in June.‎ ‎（ ）11. The teachers in the Guidance Department usually _______.‎ A. do most of their work for the students B. answer all the questions from parents C. help other teachers get along with students and parents D. only bring report cards to students and parents ‎（ ） 12. In December parents usually _______.‎ A. stay at home with their children for their holidays B. wait for the teachers to bring report cards to their children C. wouldn’t like to visit the teachers in the Guidance Department D. let teachers have a good rest during their holidays ‎（ ） 13. _____ teachers working in the Guidance Department at Berryville High School.‎ A. 55 B. 35 C. 15 D. 11‎ ‎（ ）14. Why do some parents come to school in March? Because ______.‎ A. they want to see their children’s teachers after Christmas holidays B. they are called by the teachers of Guidance Department C. bad marks have them do it D. it’s the beginning of a new school year ‎（ ）15. Which of the following is right?‎ A. In June the school decides who will stay in the same grade again.‎ B. Almost all the parents come to meet Mildred Foreman every month.‎ C. April is also the second busiest month for the staff.‎ D. The parents help to do most of the work for the staff. ‎ 第一组答案（共3篇）：1--- 5 DADAB 6---10 . D AADA 11---15 AADCA ‎ ‎ 第二组：‎ ‎（4）‎ Visit Dongqian Lake Zoo Come and see big elephants from Yunnan and tigers from the northeast. The African giraffes are waiting for you. Clever monkeys are going to make you laugh. A lot of other animals you have never seen are waiting to meet you.‎ Tickets Grown-ups: ￥80‎ Children: ￥40‎ Under Six: Free Opening Hours From Monday to Friday: 8:30 a.m.－－－4：30 p.m.‎ Saturday and Sunday: 8：00a.m.－－－5：30 p.m.‎ Keep the zoo clean.‎ Do not feed or go near to the animals.‎ ‎( ) 1. All the animals above are _______.‎ A. from Africa B. in the northeast C. from China D. in the zoo ‎( ) 2. Which animal is full of fun?‎ A. A monkey. B. A giraffe. C. A tiger. D. An elephant.‎ ‎( ) 3. Now Mr. and Mrs. King are going to the zoo with their seven-year-old son. How much will they pay for the tickets?‎ A. One hundred and twenty yuan. B. One hundred and sixty yuan.‎ C. Two hundred yuan. D. Eighty yuan.‎ ‎( ) 4. Which is the visiting time?‎ A. 8:00 a.m. on Monday. B. 5:00 p.m. on Thursday.‎ C. 8:30 a.m. on Saturday D. 7:30 p.m. on Sunday.‎ ‎( ) 5. We can _______ in the zoo.‎ A. throw dirty things B. not go close to the animals C. not laugh D. give food to the animals ‎（5）‎ Once there was something wrong with a machine in a factory. The workers could do nothing but turn to a German engineer for help, who drew a line on it and then said, “Take off the part where the line is and change it for a new one. ”The machine, with a new line on, began running well again. The engineer then asked for $30,000 for what he had done. The following were what he wrote on a bill, “The new part only costs one dollar, and knowing where the problem with the machine is costs $29,999.”‎ One dollar for changing a new part sounds reasonable （有道理的）but the $29,999 is exactly the value （价值）of wisdom （智慧）and knowledge.‎ ‎( ) 6. The factory turned to the German engineer because _______.‎ A. he had nothing to do in the factory B. there were no other people in the factory C. the workers could not repair the machine D. the workers asked for too much money for repairing the machine ‎( ) 7. The problem of the machine _______.‎ A. was caused by the German engineer B. was found and solved by the workers C. took the engineer a long time to find D. was just a line ‎( ) 8. According to the engineer, the finding of the problem cost _______.‎ A. only one dollar B. $ 29.999 C. nothing D. less than the now part ‎( ) 9. The writer wants to tell us that ________.‎ A. the engineer asked for too much money B. the workers should pay the money C. the knowledge is worth money D. the new part could cost more ‎( ) 10. The best title for the passage should be _______.‎ A. The Value of Knowledge B. Helpless Workers C. The Expensive Machine D. The Lucky Factory ‎（6）‎ ‎“Last week was Road Safety Week at Jason’s school. All the students had to take part in a talk on road safety which was given by a police officer. The following is what the police officer said. ”‎ ‎“Most traffic accidents shouldn’t happen. They happen because people are careless. A frequent cause of traffic accidents is speed. Some people drive too quickly. This means that if they have to stop suddenly, they cannot stop quickly enough to avoid （避免）hitting other vehicles （车辆）or people. You need to remember this when you are crossing the street or walking along the sidewalk. ”‎ ‎“It’s not only drivers who cause accidents, however. People on foot－pedestrians, and bicycle riders often cause accidents, too. Pedestrians sometimes walk out into the street without looking. You should always look on both sides before stepping into the street. ”‎ ‎“Do any of you ride a bike? Bicycle riders can cause accidents by changing directions suddenly or without warning other road users. Before you turn left, for example, you should check behind you to make sure there aren’t any cars, trucks or buses coming. You should show with your left hand to tell that you want to turn left. You should not turn until the street is clear. ”‎ ‎“The rules of the road are very simple. If we learn them and obey （遵守）them, we should not have accidents any more. ”‎ ‎( )11. The main idea of the story is _______.‎ A. obeying the rules of the road can keep you from having accidents B. it was Road Safety Week at Jason’s school C. it’s not only drivers who cause traffic accidents D. some people have accidents because they drive too quickly ‎( )12. Why do most traffic accidents happen?‎ A. Because people stop their cars suddenly.‎ B. Because people don’t know the rules.‎ C. Because people don’t care if they have an accident.‎ D. Because people are careless.‎ ‎( )13. How can bicycle riders cause accidents?‎ A. By crossing the road without warning other road users.‎ B. By turning suddenly or without warning other road users.‎ C. By making sure there aren’t any cars coming.‎ D. By showing suddenly or without warning other road users.‎ ‎( )14. The word “frequent”in the passage means ________ in Chinese.‎ A. 频繁的 B. 偶尔的 C. 所有的 D. 罕见的 ‎( )15. Which of the following is the best title of this passage?‎ A. Road Safety Week B. A Talk on Safety C. Safety First D. Safety and Accidents 第二组答案（共3篇）：（4）1---5 DACCB（5）6---10 CDBCA（6）11---15. A DBAB ‎ ‎ 第三组：‎ ‎（7）‎ The day was like any other day in his life. Tom walked past the shop on the street corner. He stopped to look at the front row of shoes, and he felt happy to see that the pair of shoes he wanted very much was still there. Looking down at his old shoes, he felt sorry for himself. He really wanted to have them for his birthday.‎ He sadly walked away and thought how to tell his mother about it. He knew very well she had little money. He decided not to go home at once, as he looked sad and his mother would notice it.‎ ‎ So he went to the park and sat on the grass. There he saw a boy moving a wheelchair with his hands. Tom looked at him and was surprised to see that the boy had no feet. He looked at his own feet. “It’s much better to be without shoes than without feet. ”he thought. There was no reason for him to feel so sorry and sad. He went away and smiled, thinking he was happier. ( )1. Tom passed the shop _________.‎ A. on foot B. by bike C. in a wheelchair D. by bus ‎( )2. Tom stopped in front of the shop because he wanted to _______.‎ A. buy the shoes B. look at the shoes he liked C. buy a present for his friend D. get something for his birthday party ‎( )3. That pair of shoes Tom liked was _______.‎ A. too cheap B. too large for him C. not sold yet D. not there ‎( )4. Why did Tom go to the park? Because ________.‎ A. many nice shoes were sold there B. he wanted to play there for a while C. he wanted to see his disabled friend D. he didn’t want to make his mother worried ‎( ) 5. We can learn from the story that Tom ________.‎ A. liked new shoes very much B. loved his mother very much C. didn’t want to stay at home D. had no feet ‎(8 )‎ There is a saying that the British like a nice cup of tea in the morning and a nice cup of tea at night. And at half past seven, their idea of heaven is a nice cup of tea. They like a nice cup of tea with their dinner and a nice cup of tea time. and before they go to bed, there is a lot to be said about a nice cup of tea!‎ Sometimes it seems that no one like tea as much as the British do. But in fact, tea is liked in countries around the world. In China and Japan tea was first used as a medicine, many years later, people there drank tea as a beverage（饮料）.‎ People in the world like to drink different kinds of tea, green, black or red as some people call it.‎ ‎ Served in different ways. But they all know that drinking tea is good for one’s health.‎ ‎( )6. The main idea of the first paragraph（自然段）is ________.‎ A. how many cups of tea the British drink each day B. that the British like talking about tea C. that the British can’t live without drinking tea D. that tea is very important in the life of the British ‎( )7. The phrase “their idea of heaven”means ________.‎ A. the happiest thing for them B. their thoughts C. their God D. the worst thing for them ‎( )8. The sentence “there is a lot to be said about a nice cup of tea”means ________.‎ A. they enjoy drinking a nice cup of tea B. there is a lot of tea C. they talk much about a nice cup of tea D. there is a talk while drinking tea ‎( )9. From the passage we know tea was used as a medicine __________ many years ago.‎ A. the world B. British C. many countries D. China and Japan ‎( )10. This passage mainly tells us _________.‎ A. people in different countries like drinking different tea B. something interesting about tea C. how many kinds of tea there are in the world D. drinking tea is good for our health ‎ (9 )‎ Young people can have problems with their minds. Some students become worried because they have to study very hard. Others have trouble getting on well with people like their parents and ‎ classmates.‎ Liu Wei, a Junior 2 student from Hefei, could not understand his teacher and was doing badly in his lessons. He became so worried about it that he started to cut his finger with a knife.‎ Another student, 14-year-old Yan Fang from Guangzhou, was afraid of exams. She got very worried in one, and when she looked at the exam paper. She couldn’t think of anything to write.‎ A recent report from Jiefang Daily says about 18% of Shanghai teenagers have mental （心理的，精神的）problems. Their troubles include（包括）bring worried and very unhappy. And having problems in learning and getting on with people. Many students who have problems won’t go for advice （劝告）or help. Some think they will look stupid（愚蠢）if they go to see a doctor. Others don’t want to talk about their secret.‎ Liang Yuezhu, an expert on teenagers from Beijing Anding Hospital has the following advice for teenagers:‎ ‎*Talk to your parents or teachers often ‎*Take part in group activities and play sports ‎*Go to see a doctor if you feel unhappy or unwell ‎( )11 The students who often become worried or have trouble getting on with others may have _______.‎ A. mental problems B. a headache C. knives with them D. no parents ‎( )12. Liu Wei cut his finger with a knife because ________.‎ A. he was afraid of his teacher B. he wanted to frighten his parents C. he was so worried about his studies D. his finger was badly hurt ‎( ) 13. Yan Fang’s problems happened whenever ________.‎ A. she studied very hard B. she had exams C. she talked with her parents D. she thought of something ‎( ) 14. Students who have problems won’t ask others for help because ________.‎ A. they won’t let others think they are stupid B. they don’t think doctors can help them C. they don’t want to tell their secret to others D. both A and C ‎( )15. Liang Yuezhu’s advice tells us that ________.‎ A. it’s better for the students who have mental problems to join others B. it’s unnecessary for them to be with others C. only group activities and sports can help them D. teachers and parents can’t do anything about mental problems 第三组答案（共3篇）：1---5 A BCD. B 6---10 D ACDB 11---15 A CBDA ‎ ‎ 第四组：‎ ‎(10)‎ ‎　　Once upon a time, there lived a rich man. He had a servant (仆人). He and the servant(仆人） loved wine and good food very much. Each time the rich man left his home, the servant would drink the wine and eat up all the nice food in the house. The rich man knew what his servant did, but he had never caught his servant doing that. ‎ ‎　　One morning, when he left home, he said to the servant, “Here are two bottles of poison (毒药) and some nice food in the house. You must take of them.” With these words, he went out. ‎ ‎　　But the servant knew that the rich man had said was untrue. After the rich man was away from his home, he enjoyed a nice meal. Because he drank too much, he was drunk and fell to the ground. When the rich man came back, he couldn’t find his food and his wine. He became very angry. He woke the servant up. But the servant told his story very well. He said a cat had eaten up everything. He was afraid to be punished, so he drank the poison to kill himself. ‎ ‎　　( )1.In the story, _______ liked wine and good food very much. ‎ ‎　　A. the rich man 　　B. the servant 　　C. both A and B 　　D. neither A and B ‎ ‎　　( )2.The rich man knew that it was _______ that drank the wine and ate up all the nice food. ‎ ‎　　A. the cat 　　 　　B. himself 　　　　C. nobody 　　　　　D. the servant ‎ ‎　　( )3.The rich told the servant that there was poison in the two bottles, because ________. ‎ ‎　　A. there was in fact poison in the bottles ‎ ‎　　B. did not want the servant to drink his wine ‎ ‎　　C. he wanted to kill the cat ‎ ‎　　D. he wanted to kill the servant ‎ ‎　　( )4.In fact, _______ ate all the nice food and drank the wine. ‎ ‎　　A. the servant 　　B. cat 　　C. the rich man 　　D. nobody ‎ ‎　　( )5.From the story, we know that the servant is very _______. ‎ ‎　　A. lazy 　　B. bad 　　C. clever 　　D. kind ‎ ‎(11)‎ ‎　　Most American families are smaller than the families in other countries. Most American families have one or two parents and one or two children each. ‎ ‎　　Children in the US will leave their parents’ home when they grow up. They usually live far from their parents because they want to find good jobs. They often write to their parents or telephone them. And they often go to visit their parents on holiday.‎ ‎　　Parents usually let their children choose their own jobs. Americans think it important for young people to decide on their lives by themselves.‎ ‎　　Children are asked to do some work around their house. And in many families, children are paid for doing some housework so that they learn how to make money for their own use.‎ ‎　　( )6.The size of most American families is ________ that of other countries.‎ ‎　　A. larger than 　　B. smaller than 　　C. as big as　　D. as small as ‎　　( )7.When children grow up, they leave their parents’ home to _________.‎ ‎　　A. get married 　　B. be free 　　C. find good jobs 　　D. study ‎　　( )8.They visit their parents ________.‎ ‎　　A. on weekdays 　　B. on weekends 　　C. at any time 　　D. on holiday ‎　　( )9.Which of the following statements is WRONG?‎ ‎　　A. Children have the freedom to choose their own job.‎ ‎　　B. Parents don’t ask their children to do the housework.‎ ‎　　C. Parents think it important for children to make their own decision.‎ ‎　　D. When children grow up, they usually live far away from their home.‎ ‎　　( )10.Some parents pay their children for doing housework because ___________.‎ ‎　　A. children can learn how to make money for themselves ‎　　B. their children required them to do so ‎　　C. they are rich ‎　　D. it is required by law 第四组答案：（10） 1. C 2. D 3. B 4. A 5. C 　　　（11） 6. B 7. C 8. D 9. B 10. A ‎ ‎ ‎ 第五组：‎ ‎(12 )‎ ‎　　Easter (复活节) is one of the two major (主要的) Christian (基督教的) festivals (节日). Easter celebrates (庆祝) the death (死亡) and resurrection (复活) of Jesus Christ (耶酥基督) and Christmas celebrates his birth (出生). It's not as big a festival as Christmas. It starts usually in late March or early April and the Easter holiday is Friday，Saturday，Sunday and Monday. It's quite a long holiday for everybody.‎ ‎　　The main (主要的) symbol (象征物) of Easter is the Easter egg. Children like Easter eggs because they are made of chocolate. Eggs are a symbol of new life.‎ ‎　　Easter is also a time for families to get together like Christmas. Many people see Easter as a nice long holiday and they have a good time with their families and friends.‎ ‎　　1. People love Easter because ________.‎ ‎　　　a. it's a long holiday ‎ ‎　　　b. it's the birthday of Jesus Christ ‎　　　c. they can have real eggs on that day ‎ ‎　　　d. everybody believes in Jesus Christ ‎　　2. From the passage above，which sentence is wrong?‎ ‎　　　a. Easter is one of the most important festivals in western countries.‎ ‎　　　b. Easter is a day that everybody gets his resurrection.‎ ‎　　　c. Easter is a religious (宗教) festival.‎ ‎　　　d. Most people love Easter.‎ ‎　　3. People begin to celebrate Easter in ________.‎ ‎　　　a. mid-April or late April ‎ ‎　　　b. mid-March or late March ‎　　　c. late March or early April ‎ ‎　　　d. early March or mid-March ‎　　4. Easter eggs are ________.‎ ‎　　　a. covered by chocolate (用巧克力包着的)‎ ‎　　　b. chocolate eggs ‎　　　c. a symbol of death ‎ ‎　　　d. not food ‎　　5. From the passage above，we can know that -________.‎ ‎　　　a. Jesus Christ died on Christmas Day ‎ ‎　　　b. Jesus Christ was born on Christmas Day ‎　　　c. Jesus Christ was born on Easter ‎ ‎　　　d. Jesus Christ died and got his resurrection on Christmas Day ‎ ‎　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 (13)‎ ‎　　We drink tea every day. But more than three hundred years ago most of the people in Europe (欧洲) did not know anything about tea. Some people heard about it，but very few of them know what to do with it.‎ ‎　　There is a story about an English sailor (水手) who went to countries in the east，the west and the south. He went to India and China. One day he came home and brought some tea as a present for his mother. She told her friends about the present and asked them to a "tea party". When her friends came to the "tea party"，the old woman offered (给) them brown tea-leaves (茶叶). The old woman's friends began to eat them. Of course， nobody liked the tea-leaves.‎ ‎　　At that time the sailor came in. He looked at the table and said，"Mother，what have you done with the tea?"‎ ‎　　"I boiled (煮) it，as you said."‎ ‎　　"And what did you do with the water?"‎ ‎　　"I threw it away，of course." answered the old woman.‎ ‎　　"Now you may throw away the leaves，too，" said her son.‎ ‎　　6. Most of the people in Europe ________.‎ ‎　　　a. drank tea every day 300 years ago ‎ ‎　　　b. drink tea every day ‎　　　c. know nothing about tea ‎ ‎　　　d. like to eat the tea-leaves ‎　　7. One day the English sailor brought his mother some tea from ________.‎ ‎　　　a. countries in the west ‎ ‎　　　b. countries in the south ‎　　　c. India or China ‎ ‎　　　d. a tea shop in England ‎　　8. The sailor's mother asked her friends to her house，because ________.‎ ‎　　　a. the sailor told her to ‎ ‎　　　b. she wanted to ask her friends what to do with the tea ‎　　　c. she liked to show off (炫耀) ‎ ‎　　　d. she wanted to sample (品尝) the tea together with her friends ‎　　9. At the "tea party"，________.‎ ‎　　　a. all the woman's friends spoke highly of the tea ‎　　　b. nobody knew what to do with the tea ‎　　　c. the woman offered her friends some dried (干的) tea ‎　　　d. the woman gave her friends each a glass of tea water ‎　　10. What mistake did the old woman make? She ________.‎ ‎　　　a. boiled the tea ‎ ‎　　　b. did as the sailor said ‎ ‎　　　c. poured away the water ‎ ‎　　　d. didn't throw away the tea-leaves 第五组答案：（12）1.a 　2.d 　3.c　4.b　5.b 　　　（13）6.b 　7.c 　8.d 　9.b 　10.c ‎ ‎ 第六组：‎ ‎(14)‎ ‎　　Last year, we had an English teacher from the United States. We called him Mr.Black. He often told us, “English is very useful in the world.” He taught us very well. He was strict with us all. In class he always gave us more time to speak English. At first I could hardly understand a word and I could not talk in English at all. But soon I found English was not so hard and I could talk to my classmates in English. So I began to like it very much.‎ ‎　　Now Mr.Black taught in another school. This year we have a new teacher, Mrs.Green. She also teaches us very carefully. She often asks us to recite（背诵）the texts and play games. With the help of the two foreign teachers, we all have made progress.‎ Now I am enjoying studying this subject. I am sure I will learn a lot this year.‎ ‎　　根据短文内容判断正误（正确：T ，错误：F）‎ ‎　　( )1. This year our English teacher is still Mr.Black.‎ ‎　　( )2. Mr.Black told us that English was the most important language in the world.‎ ‎　　( )3. In Mr.Black’s class, students do not have much time to speak English.‎ ‎　　( )4. Mrs.Green often plays games with us.‎ ‎　　( )5. “I” like English study.‎ ‎　　　　　　　　　　　　　 (15)‎ ‎　　Once there was an old man in a town. He always forgot a lot of things. So his wife always had to say to him, “Don’t forget this!”‎ ‎　　One day he went on a long trip alone. Before he left home, his wife said, “Now you have all these things. They are what you need for your trip. Take care of your things during the trip.” He went to the station, bought a ticket and got on the train with it.‎ ‎　　About half an hour later, the conductor began to see the tickets. He came to the old man and said, “Will you please show me your ticket?” The old man looked for his ticket in all his pockets, but he could not find it. He was very worried. “I can’t find my ticket. I really bought a ticket before I got on the train.”said the old man.‎ ‎　　“I believe you bought a ticket. All right, you don’t have to buy another one,” said the conductor kindly. “But how can I know where I’m going? – I can’t remember my station!”the old man said sadly.‎ ‎　　根据短文内容，选择最佳答案 ‎　　( )1.The old man in the story was very ______.‎ ‎　　　　A. kind　　　B. poor 　C. forgetful　 　D. sad ‎　　( )2.Where is the ticket? _______‎ ‎　　　　A.The old man forgot to buy it.‎ ‎　　　　B.The old man could not remember where it was.‎ ‎　　　　C.The old man showed it to the conductor.‎ ‎　　　　D.The old man’s wife took the ticket away.‎ ‎　　( )3.The old bought the ticket _____ he got on the train.‎ ‎　　　　A. after 　　B. before　 　C. as D. when ‎　　( )4.The conductor ______ the old man.‎ ‎　　　　A. didn’t believe 　B.laughed at　　C. believed D.felt sorry for ‎　　( )5.The old man was sad because _______‎ ‎　　　　A.he had to buy another ticket.‎ ‎　　　　B.he lost all the things his wife gave him.‎ ‎　　　　C.he did not know where he was.‎ ‎　　　　D.he did not know where he should get off.‎ ‎ ‎ 第六组答案：（14） 1.F 2.F 3.F 4.T 5.T　（15） 1.C 2.B 3.B 4.C 5.D ‎ ‎ 第七组：‎ ‎（16）‎ A good memory is a great help in learning a language. Everybody learns his own language by remembering what he hears when he is a small child, and some children －like boys and girls who ‎ live abroad with their parents－seem to learn two languages almost as easily as one. In school it is not easy to learn a second language because the pupils have so little time for it, and they are busy with other subjects, too.‎ Our mind is rather like a camera, but it takes photos not only of what we see but of what we feel, hear, smell and taste. When we take a real photo with a camera, there is much to do before the photo is finished and ready to show to our friends. In the same way there is much work to be done before we can keep a picture forever （永远）in our mind.‎ Memory is the diary that we all carry about with us.‎ ‎（ ）1. We usually begin to learn our own language by _______ it.‎ A. speaking B. hearing C. saying D. teaching ‎（ ）2. If you have a good ________, you’ll have less difficulty in learning something.‎ A. teacher B. camera C. memory D. family ‎（ ）3. The children who live abroad with their parents can learn two languages more easily because _________.‎ A. they are very clever B. they have good teachers C. they have more chances to use these languages D. they have a better life ‎（ ）4. _______ can take photos of what can be seen, felt, heard, smelt and tasted.‎ A. A camera B. Memory C. A diary D. A man’s mind ‎（ ）5. Memory is ________ that we keep in our mind and carry about.‎ A. the best diary B. the best camera C. a great help D. a beautiful picture ‎（17）‎ The world is not only hungry, it will also be thirsty for water. About 97% of water on the earth is sea water, or salt water. Man can only drink or use the other 3％of the fresh water （淡水）which comes from rivers, lakes and underground. On the other hand, because the number of people in the world is becoming larger and larger, more and more fresh water is needed. So water shortage becomes a big problem.‎ How can we work out this problem? Scientists have found some ways to turn salt water into fresh water. One important way is to boil （使达到沸点）sea water with high heat until vapor （蒸汽）rises, leaving the salt. In this way, a lot of fresh water can be made quickly.‎ But heating is not the only way to get fresh water. Other ways are tried, for example, digging deep wells, keeping rain water and preventing rivers from being polluted.‎ Which way is the best? To get the most fresh water for the least money is the best.‎ ‎（ ）6. Where does the fresh water people need come from?‎ A. Sea water. B. Rivers and lakes. C. Underground. D. Both B and C.‎ ‎（ ）7. From this passage we know fresh water ________.‎ A. only comes from the rain B. can be used in many ways ‎ C. can be found in many factories D. is needed by more and more people ‎（ ）8 The word shortage in this passage means ________.‎ A. being enough B. being short of C. being short for D. being less ‎（ ） 9. What is the writer mainly talking about in this passage?‎ A. The ways of getting fresh water.‎ B. How to use fresh water in our daily life.‎ C. All people in the world should save water.‎ D. Different ways of making water in different places.‎ ‎（ ）10. Which of the following is true?‎ A. Hunger is the only problem in our world.‎ B. Water shortage is the only problem in our world.‎ C. Scientists don’t want to spend money solving the water problem.‎ D. Scientists have been working hard and have made much progress in solving water problem.‎ ‎（18）‎ Today there are 6 billion people on the earth. By the year 2050 there may be 12.5 billion. This is a lot of people to feed. We need more food.‎ One way to produce more food is by growing stronger plants. For thousands of years, farmers have made plants better. Every season, they pick the best plants for the next season. It works very slowly. Since 1983, scientists have been able to change plants more quickly by changing their genetic material （遗传物质）. Foods from plants grown in this way are called genetically modified foods （转基因食品）, or GM foods.‎ By changing the genetic material of a plant, it is possible to make new plants. They make plants which are strong against plant diseases. They can also help in our diseases: a kind of rice is being prepared （准备）, for example, which stops people from becoming blind.‎ Rich countries produce GM foods because they are easy to grow and bring in more money. Poor countries are interested in them because they help produce more food.‎ GM plants are not natural. No one knows how good or bad they are. Making GM foods is only one way of feeding people in 2050. There are strong feelings against them, because they are unnatural. They may feed people, then hurt them or their children later. But, both rich and poor countries are very interested in their use, and they are not going to go away. In 2050 we may think differently about them.‎ ‎（ ）11. GM foods are made by ________.‎ A. farmers B. workers C. scientists D. plants ‎（ ）12. What are the good things about GM foods?‎ A. They make plants strong against diseases. B. They are unnatural.‎ C. They can help in human diseases. D. Both A and C.‎ ‎（ ）13. GM foods ________.‎ A. are a quick way to produce food B. grow in the wild （野生）‎ C. are safe D. are grown only in rich countries ‎（ ）14. Why do some people not like GM foods?‎ A. They are not useful. B. They are not helpful.‎ C. They are not natural. D. They are not cheap.‎ ‎（ ）15. From the reading we know that ________.‎ A. GM foods will disappear one day in the future B. GM foods will not disappear in the future C. people will not be interested in GM foods D. people will have to stop using GM foods ‎ 第七组答案（共3篇）：1—5 BCCD A 6---10 DDB A D 11---15 C D AC B 阅读理解专项训练 第八组：‎ ‎（1）‎ Little Tom down the street calls our dog "The keep dog".Zip is a sheep dog. But when Tom tries to say" Seep", it comes out "keep". And in a way Tom is right. Zip is always bringing things hoem for us to keep! I'll tell you about some of them.‎ Zip's first present was a shoe. It was made of green silk.‎ We didn't know how Zip found the shoe. But after a moment Mary, my big sister, told me the shoe had a strange smell. I nodded(点头)and held my nose. "What do you think it is?"‎ ‎"It smells like something for cleaning. I think someone tried to clean a spot (污点) off the shoe. Then he put it at the door to dry."‎ ‎"Along came Zip. And good-bye shoe!" I said."We should take it back."‎ ‎"We can't ".said my sistter.‎ ‎"Maybe little Tom is right," Mary said. "Maybe Zip is a keep dog!"‎ ‎1.The writer and Mary didn't know______.‎ A.what Zip's first present was B.how Zip carried its first present home C.who owned Zip's first present D.what Zip's first present was made of ‎2.Tom calls Zip "the keep dog"because ______.‎ A.the dog likes keeping things B.the dog likes playing with shoes C.he doesn't know the dog's name D.he can't pronounce the word "sheep"well ‎3.What made the shoe strange was ______.‎ A.its colour B.its smell C.its size D.that it was a silk one ‎4.The word "keep"in the last sentence means "_____"‎ A.keeping things for itself B.bringing things for other to keep C.not letting it run about D.taking care of a small child ‎5.We can know from the reading that the dog _____.‎ A. likes to give presents to people B.has been kept in at the writer's home C.has brought some trouble D.likes to be called "the keep dog"‎ Key: 1.C 2.D 3.B 4.B 5C ‎ (2)‎ An old lady in a plane had a blanket（毯子）over her head and she did not want to take it off . The air hostess spoke to her, but the old lady said, “I have never been in a plane before , and I am frightened. I am going to keep this blanket over my head until we are back on the ground again !”‎ Then the captain came. He said, “Madam, I am the captain of this plane. The weather is fine, there are no clouds in the sky, and everything is going very well. ”But she continued to hide.‎ So the captain turned and started to go back. Then the old lady looked out from under the blanket with one eye and said, “I am sorry, young man, but I don’t like planes and I am never going to fly again. But I’ll say one thing, ”She continued kindly, “You and your wife keep your plane very clean!”‎ ‎1. An old lady had _________ .‎ A. glasses B. a blanket over her head C. a coat D. a basket ‎2. A. She didn’t want to ________ .‎ A. take it off B. turn it off C. get on D. talk about it ‎3. _________ spoke to her .‎ A. The air hostess B. The man next to her C. her husband D. one of her friends ‎4. The old lady had never been _________ before .‎ A. abroad B. home C. in a plane D. in hospital ‎5. The woman didn’t like planes and she was never going ________ .‎ A. to fly again B. to travel C. to go abroad D. to go home Key: 1－5 BAACA ‎ ‎（3）‎ Dick lived in England. One day in January he said to his wife, "I'm going to fly to New York next week because I've got some work there." "Where are you going to stay there?" his wife asked. "I don't know yet." Dick answered. "Please send me your address from there in a telegram (电报),"‎ ‎ his wife said. "All right," Dick answered.‎ He flew to New York on January 31st and found a nice hotel in the center of the city. He put his things in his room and then he sent his wife a telegram. He put the address of his hotel in it.‎ In the evening he didn't have any work, so he went to a cinema. He came out at nine o'clock and said, "Now I'm going back to my hotel and have a nice dinner."‎ He found a taxi (出租车) and the driver said, "Where do you want to go?" But Dick didn't remember the name and address of his hotel.‎ ‎"Which hotel are my things in?" he said, "And what am I going to do tonight?" But the driver of the taxi did not know. So Dick got out and went into a post office. There he sent his wife another telegram, and in it he wrote, "Please send me my address at this post office."‎ ‎1. Dick flew to New York because ___.‎ A. he went there for a holiday B. he had work there C. he went there for sightseeing (观光) D. his home was there ‎2. Why did his wife want a telegram from him? ‎ A. Because she didn't know his address yet ‎ B. Because she wanted to go to New York, too C. Because she might send him another telegram D. Because she couldn't leave her husband by himself in New York ‎3. Where did Dick stay in New York?‎ A. In the center of the city. B. In a hotel. C. In a restaurant. D. At his friend's house.‎ ‎4. Who would send him the name and address of his hotel?‎ A. The manager (经理) of his hotel. B. The police office. C. The taxi driver. D. His wife.‎ ‎5. Which of the following is not true?‎ A. Dick stayed at a nice hotel in the center of the city.‎ B. Dick didn't work on the first night of his arrival.‎ C. Dick forgot to send his wife a telegram.‎ D. Dick wanted to go back to his hotel in a taxi. ‎ Key: 1-5 B A B D C ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ （4）‎ Bob and Jim once worked in the same factory. One day, Bob lent Jim ten dollars, but then Jim left his work and went to work in another town without paying back the money.‎ Bob didn't see Jim for a year, and then he knew from another friend that Jim was in another town and staying at a hotel. So he went there to see him late in the evening.‎ When he got to Jim's room, he saw his shoes near the door. "Well, he must be in," he thought, and knocked again, and said, "I know you are in, Jim. Your shoes are out here."‎ ‎"I've gone out in my boots," answered Jim.‎ True or False ‎1. Bob and Jim once worked in different factories.‎ ‎2. One day Jim borrowed ten dollars from Bob.‎ ‎3. Jim paid back the money to Bob and went to work in another town later.‎ ‎4. Bob hadn't seen Jim for a year when he learned that Jim was in another town.　‎ Key: 1-4 F T F T ‎ ‎ ‎ （5）‎ ‎ ‎ I think the most terrible thing in life for my little brother is getting up in the morning. He is almost sick when my mother calls, "Herbert! It's seven o'clock! Get up!"‎ Herbert answers, "I'm coming!" and goes right back to sleep. I'm not at all like my brother. I don't ‎ like to go to bed at night but I don't mind getting up in the morning. I usually wake up before my mother calls me. I jump out of bed and go into the bathroom to take a shower. I get dressed, brush my teeth, comb my hair, and get ready to go downstairs for breakfast as soon as my mother calls.‎ But not Herbert. He just sleeps. A military band (军乐队) in our bedroom could not wake him up. I call him and say, "Get up! Mum will be up here to pull you out of bed if you don't get up immediately!"‎ But he just sleeps. After calling a few more times my mother has to come upstairs and pull Herbert out of bed. It's that way every day with my little brother. Perhaps some day he'll learn to get up on time, but I really don't think so.‎ ‎ ‎ True or False ‎1. The most terrible thing in life for my little brother is going to school.　‎ ‎2. I'm not like my brother because I like to go to bed early at night and get up early in the morning.‎ ‎3. I usually jump out of bed and go into the bathroom for a shower before my mother calls.‎ ‎4. When mother calls, Herbert doesn't answer and remains in bed.‎ ‎5. My mother often has to go upstairs and pull Herbert out of bed as he refuses to get up.‎ ‎6. Sometimes we have to send for a military band to wake Herbert up.‎ ‎7. The writer thinks some day Herbert will learn to get up on time.‎ Key: 1-7. F T T F T F F ‎ ‎ ‎ （6）‎ In England, people often talk about the weather because they can experience (经历) four seasons in one day. In the morning the weather is warm just like in spring. An hour later black clouds come and then it rains hard. The weather gets a little cold. In the late afternoon the sky will be sunny, the sun will begin to shine, and it will be summer at this time of a day.‎ In England, people can also have summer in winter, or have winter in summer. So in winter they can swim sometimes, and in summer sometimes they should take warm clothes. ‎ When you go to England, you will see that some English people usually take an umbrella (伞)or a raincoat with them in the sunny morning, but you should not laugh at them.‎ If you don't take an umbrella or a raincoat, you will regret (后悔) later in the day.‎ ‎1. Why do people in England often talk about the weather?‎ A. Because they may have four seasons in one day B. Because they often have very good weather C. Because the weather is warm just like in spring D. Because the sky is sunny all day ‎2. From the story we know that when _________come, there is a heavy rain.‎ A. sunshine and snow B. black clouds C. summer and winter D. spring and autumn ‎3. "People can also have summer in winter." Means "it is sometimes too ______in winter."‎ A. warm B. cool C. cold D. rainy ‎4. In the sunny morning some English people usually take a raincoat or an umbrella with them because ________.‎ A. their friends ask them to do so B. it often rains in England C. they are going to sell them D. they are their favourite things ‎5. The best title (标题)for this passage is ________.‎ A. Bad Seasons B. Summer or Winter ‎ C. The Weather in England D. Strange English People ‎ ‎ ‎ KEY: ABABC ‎ ‎ ‎ （7）‎ Mr Brown was going away for a week. Before he left, he said to his son, "if anyone asks for me, you can tell him that your father has been out for doing something, and will be back in a week, then be sure to ask him to sit down for a cup of tea."‎ ‎"OK, Dad," said his son. But he was afraid his son couldn't remember this, he wrote these words down on a piece of paper and gave it to him. His son put it into his small pocket, took it out and looked at it every now and then.‎ Four days passed, but no one came to see his father. The boy thought that there was no man to come and that the piece of paper was of no more use for him, so he burnt it that evening.‎ The next afternoon, someone knocked at the door. The boy opened it. A man was standing at the door and said, "Where is your father?" The boy put his hand into his pocket at once and looked for the piece of paper. He could not find it. He suddenly remembered he had burnt it, so he shouted, "No more."‎ The man was very surprised. He asked, "No more? I met your father last week. When did it happen?"‎ ‎"Burnt yesterday evening."‎ ‎1. Mr Brown told his son that _____.‎ A. he would be away from home for four days B. he would be back in seven days ‎ C. he would be back in a month D. he liked a cup of tea ‎2. Mr Brown wrote the words down on ________.‎ A. the wall B. the door C. a piece of paper D. his son's pocket ‎3. A man came to visit the boy's father on ________.‎ A. the second day B. the third day C. the fourth day D. the fifth day ‎4. The man was very surprised because _________.‎ A. he thought the child's father was dead B. the child didn't ask him to sit down C. the child gave him a cup of tea D. he couldn't find that piece of paper ‎5. What was burnt? ___________.‎ A. The piece of paper B. Mr Smith C. The visitor D. The boy KEY: BCDAA ‎ ‎ ‎（8）‎ One of the things to be learnt in a foreign language is guessing all the time what kind of thing to come when listening to someone talking. People do this all the time in their own language, so it is necessary (必要的) to do this in a foreign language, too. Here are some examples.‎ ‎1. "What's the matter？" "I went to a party last night, so I…"‎ ‎2. "I feel so tired these days."" I think you'd better…"‎ ‎3."Of course, she never stops talking. She is one of the most…"‎ You can see from the above three examples that the context (上下文) helps a lot in understanding what is being talked about. So "guessing "is very important in understanding English, especially (尤其)spoken English.‎ ‎1.This passage tells us mainly about _________.‎ A. the importance of "guessing " in learning a foreign language B. how to guess what one is going to talk about ‎ C. some examples of right guessing D. how important it is to guess all the time ‎2.from the context, we can see maybe the finished answer in EXAMPLE I is _________.‎ A. "… so I didn't have a good time." B. "…so I went to bed very late."‎ C. "…. So I felt unhappy." D. "… so I got up very early."‎ ‎3. Maybe the finished answer in EXAMPLE 2 is ________.‎ A. "I think you'd better have a good rest and take good care of yourself."‎ B. "I think you'd better have something to drink."‎ C. "I think you'd better get some help from your friends."‎ D. "I think you'd better be more careful."‎ ‎4. Maybe the finished answer in EXAMPLE 3 is ______.‎ A. "… she is one of the most famous film stars."‎ B. "…she is one of the most beautiful women."‎ C. "… she is one of the most famous speakers."‎ D. " .. she is one of the most talkative women."‎ ‎5. From the passage we can infer (推断) that guessing is _______in learning a foreign language.‎ A. the only way B. more important in spoken English than in written English ‎ C. more important than any other way D. more important in written English than in spoken English KEY: ABADB ‎ ‎ ‎（9）‎ Uncle Li and Uncle Wang are good friends. They live next to each other and their farms are both at the foot of the mountain. So they can help each other. But neither of them likes to use his head. They're both poor though they work hard. Most villagers have built new houses, but they still live in the low and broken houses. They never find out why.‎ Once Uncle Li went to town to buy some medicine for his wife. In the town he heard the apples in a city were expensive. He told Uncle Wang about it as soon as he went back. They decided to carry some apples to the city. They borrowed some money from their friends and bought nearly 1,000 kilograms of apples in the villages and carried them to the city on a tractor. Bad luck! A lot of apples has already been carried there when they arrived. A few days later they had to sell them at a low price (价格)。They felt unhappy and returned to their village.‎ ‎"I can't understand why we sustained (蒙受) losses in business while others always profit (盈利)" Uncle Li asked one day.‎ ‎"The tractor was too small " Uncle Wang said without thinking. "We'll carry more apples on a truck next time!"‎ ‎"I agree!" said Uncle Li. "How foolish (傻的) we were !"‎ ‎1. Uncle Li and Uncle Wang live in the low and broken houses because __________.‎ A. they hope to save money B. they're both poor C. their farms are at the foot of the mountain D. they're not far from their farms ‎ ‎2. The two farmers carried the apples to the city to _________.‎ A. make a journey B. visit some places of interest C. meet their friends D. make a profit ‎3. the tow farmers had to sell their apples at a low price because ________.‎ A. theirs weren't as good as the others' ‎ B. theirs were much less than the others'‎ C. a lot of apples had been already carried to the city D. they forgot to carry them on a truck ‎4. Uncle Li and Uncle Wang were unhappy because _________.‎ A. they had sustained losses in business B. they had lost some money in the city C. something was wrong with the tractor D. other people profited in the city ‎5. Which of the following is true?‎ A. The two farmers found out why they were poor.‎ B. The two farmers will soon get rich.‎ C. Neither of the farmers is clever.‎ D. The two farmers decided to buy a truck.‎ KEY: BDCAC ‎ ‎ ‎（10）‎ On Christmas Eve─the night before Christmas Day─children all over Britain put a stocking at the end of their beds before they go to sleep. Their parents usually tell them that Father Christmas will come during the night.‎ Father Christmas is very kind and hearted. He gets to the top of each house and climbs down the chimney into the fireplace. He fills each of the stockings with Christmas presents.‎ Of course, Father Christmas isn't real. In Jim and Kate's house, "Father Christmas" is really Mr Green. Mr Green doesn't climb down the chimney. He waits until the children are asleep. Then he quietly goes into their bedrooms and fills their stockings with small presents. When they were very young, Mr Green sometimes wore a red coat. But he doesn't do that now. The children are no longer young, and they know who "Father Christmas" really is. But they still put their stockings at the end of their beds.‎ ‎1. Christmas Eve is __________.‎ A. the night of Christmas Day B. the evening of Christmas Day C. Christmas Day D. the night before Christmas Day ‎2. Father Christmas often puts presents ________.‎ A. into children's hats B. into children's stockings C. under children's beds D. into children's shoes ‎3. When the children were very young, __________.‎ A. they didn't know who Father Christmas was B. they knew that Father Christmas wasn't real C. they thought their father was Father Christmas ‎ D. they knew who put the presents into their stockings ‎4. When the children are older, they __________.‎ A. know that Father Christmas is real B. ask their mother to fill their stockings with presents C. know that Father Christmas is really their father D. know that Father Christmas is really their friend ‎ ‎5. Father Christmas comes into the house through the ________.‎ A. chimney B. back door C. front door D. window.‎ KEY: DBACA ‎ ‎ ‎（11）‎ ‎ ‎ Now satellites are helping to forecast（预报）the weather. They are in space, and they can reach any part of the world. The satellites take pictures of the atmosphere（大气）, because this is where the weather forms（形成）. They send these pictures to the weather stations. So meteorologists（气象学家）can see the weather of any part of the world. From the pictures, the scientists can often say how the weather will change.‎ Today, nearly five hundred weather stations in sixty countries receive satellite pictures. When they receive new pictures, the meteorologists compare（比较）them with earlier ones. Perhaps they may find that the clouds have changed during the last few hours. This may mean that the weather on the ground may soon change, too. In their next weather forecast, the meteorologists can say this.‎ So the weather satellites are a great help to the meteorologists. Before satellites were invented, the scientists could forecast the weather for about 24 or 48 hours. Now they can make good forecasts for three or five days. Soon, perhaps, they may be able to forecast the weather for a week or more ahead（提前）.‎ ‎1. Satellites travel _____________.‎ A. in space B. in the atmosphere C. above the ground D. above space ‎2. Why do we use the weather satellites to take pictures of the atmosphere? Because __________.‎ A. the weather satellites can do it easily B. clouds form there C. the weather forms there D. the pictures can forecast the weather ‎3. Meteorologists forecast the weather __________.‎ A. when they have received satellite pictures B. after they have compared new satellite pictures with earlier ones C. before they received satellite pictures D. during they study satellite pictures ‎4. Maybe we’ll soon be able to forecast the weather for ________.‎ A. one day B. two days C. five days D. seven days or even longer ‎5. The main（主要的）idea of this passage is that satellites are now used in _________.‎ A. taking pictures of the atmosphere B. receiving pictures of the atmosphere C. doing other work in many ways D. weather forecasting Keys: 1-5 ACBDD ‎ ‎ ‎（12）‎ In almost every big university（大学）in the United States, football is a favourite sport. American football is different. Players sometimes kick the ball, but they also throw the ball and run with it. They try to take it to the other end of the field. They have four chances（机会）to move the ball ten yards（码）. They can carry it or they can throw it. If they move the ball ten yards, they can try to move it another ten yards. If they move it to the end of the field, they receive six points（点）.‎ It is difficult to move the ball. Eleven men on the other team try to stop the man with the ball. If he does not move the ball ten yards, his team kicks the ball the other team.‎ Each university wants its own team to win. Many thousands of people come to watch. They all shout for their favourite team.‎ Young men and women come on the field to help the people shout more. They dance and jump while they shout.‎ Each team plays ten or eleven games each season.‎ The season begins in September and ends in November. If a team is very good, it may play another game after the season ends. The best teams play again on January 1, the first day of the New Year. Many people go to see these games and many others watch them on TV.‎ ‎1. The passage talks about ___________.‎ A. football B. how to play football C. American sports D. American football ‎2. We can _______ the football in both American football and Chinese football.‎ A. kick B. throw C. run with D. catch ‎3. Why is it difficult to move the ball? Because ___________.‎ A. ten yards is a long way B. many men on the other team try not to let the ball come near C. the playing field is very large D. eleven men have to catch the ball one by one ‎4. If they _________, the teams will play on January 1.‎ A. receive six points B. play eleven games in the season C. are the best teams D. move the ball to the end of the field ‎5. Many people come to watch football and they want their team to win. Which of the following is not their act?‎ A. Jumping B. Dancing C. Crying D. Shouting Keys: 1-5 DABCC ‎ ‎ ‎（13）‎ ‎“Who has more questions, a teacher or a student?”About this question a great learned man told his student that nobody does but a teacher.‎ The student got puzzled. With a smile, the teacher drew two circles（圆）. Within（在……里面）the larger one is my knowledge of things, and within the smaller one is yours. Out of the circles is still unknown to both of us. Since mine is larger, as you can see, the line that marks out the circle is longer. That makes it clear that who has more chances（机会）to face something still unknown.‎ ‎1. The great learned man believed that ________.‎ A. a teacher has more questions ‎ B. a student has more questions C. both a teacher and a student have questions D. everyone, except a teacher, has more questions ‎2. The student thought that ________.‎ A. a student’s knowledge is less than his teacher’s because it comes from the teacher B. a teacher can not necessarily answer all the questions his students ask C. those who have less knowledge have more questions D. anyone who learns more has more questions ‎3. At the end of the story, the great learned man concluded（推断）that ________.‎ A. a student should learn from his teacher B. a teacher does not have so many questions as his student C. a student knows more than his teacher D. a teacher has more chances to face what he doesn’t know ‎4. Which of the following topics can NOT express the idea of the story?‎ A. You Will Never Learn Enough B. A Teacher and His Student C. There Is No Limit to Knowledge D. One Is Never Too Old to Learn ‎5. We can often find such an article in ________.‎ A. the Palace Museum B. any book C. a newspaper of magazine D. An encyclopedia（百科全书）‎ Keys: 1－5 ACDBA ‎ ‎ ‎(14)‎ Mexico's neighbours are the United States to the north and Guatemala and Belize to the south. Mexico is about one quarter of the size of the United States. Mexico has more than ninety million people. The language of Mexico is Spanish. This makes Mexico the world's largest Spanish-speaking country.‎ Mexico City is the capital and largest city of Mexico. The city is also very high. It is 7349 feet high (2240 metres). This makes it one of the highest capital cities in the world. The population, of Mexico City grows bigger every day. About thirty million people live there. It has more people than any other city in the world, even more than Tokyo.‎ Mexico also has its specialities. Many of the foods we eat started in Mexico. Foods like beans, maize, avocados, tomatoes, peanuts, chili peppers, vanilla, and chocolate come from Mexico. Mexico is also famous for its cactus (仙人掌) plants. Mexico has more kinds of cactus than any other country.‎ ‎1. Mexico is ____the USA.‎ A. on the south of B. on the north of C. a part of D. as large as ‎2. Mexicans speak______.‎ A. English C. French B. Spanish D. Latin(拉丁语)‎ ‎3. Which of the following is NOT true? ‎ A. Mexico City is the capital of Mexico. ‎ B. The population of Mexico City is 30,000,000.‎ C. Tokyo is one of the cities with the largest population.‎ D. Mexico City is the highest city in the world. ‎ ‎4. Tomatoes were originally (最初) grown in ______.‎ A. America B. Spain C. Tokyo D. Mexico ‎5. The best title (题目) of the passage is ___. ‎ A. Mexico City B. Mexico's plants C. Mexico D. Mexico's population ‎[Key] 1. A 2. B 3. D 4. D 5. C ‎ ‎ ‎（15）‎ A Trip to the Forest ‎ ‎ One day Bob took two of his friends in-to the mountains. They put up their tents (帐篷) and then rode off to a forest to see how the trees were growing.‎ In the afternoon when they were about ten kilometres from their camp(营地), it start-ed to snow. More and more snow fell. Soon Bob could hardly see his hands before his face. He could not find the road. Bob knew there were two roads. One road went to the camp, and the other went to his house. But all was white snow. Everything was the same. How could he take his friends back to the camp?‎ Bob had an idea. The horses! Let the horses take them back! But what would hap-pen if the horses took the road to his house? That would be a trip of thirty-five kilometres in such cold weather!‎ It was getting late. They rode on and on. At last the horses stopped. Where were they? None of them could tell. John looked around. What was that under the tree? It was one of their tents!‎ ‎1. John and his two friends went to the forest to ____.‎ A. build their camp B. find their way home ‎ C. enjoy the mountains in the snow D. watch the trees in the forest ‎2. They could not find their way back be-cause ____.‎ A. there was only one road to their camp ‎ B. they couldn't decide which of the two roads led to their tents ‎ C. there were no roads in the mountains at all D. everything was covered by the white snow ‎3. It is clear that they wanted the horses to take them to ____.‎ A. John's house B. the camp C. the forest D. the mountains ‎4. The horses stopped because____. ‎ A. it was getting late B. they were tired after running for a long way C. they knew that they had got to the camp D. they had seen John's house ‎5. The story happened ____. ‎ A. on a cold winter day B. on a dark snowy evening ‎ C. in a cold camp far from villages D. at night when nothing could be seen ‎[Key] 1. D 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. A ‎ ‎ ‎（16）‎ Two farmers were on their way home one evening after a hard day's work. Both were tired. They happened to look up at the sky and saw a black cloud overhead. ‎ ‎"Ah!" said one farmer, "tomorrow we shall have rain and the rice will grow well." The second answered, "Nonsense (胡说), the rain will only kill the crops (庄稼)." ‎ So they began to quarrel (争吵). Just then a third farmer came along and asked them why they were quarreling. Both farmers explained about the black cloud. ‎ ‎"What cloud?" asked the third farmer. They all looked at the sky. The cloud was no longer there. ‎ Choose the right answer ‎ ‎1. The two farmers were _____. ‎ A. going home B. going to the field C. going to work D. going to see their friend ‎ ‎2. The two farmers _____ on that day. ‎ A. had a holiday B. didn't work C. worked hard D. wanted to quarrel with each other ‎ ‎3. When there are black block clouds in the sky, _____. ‎ A. it will rain soon B. it will be fine C. it will get hot D. the sun is shining brightly ‎ ‎4. The two farmers fought in words because _____. ‎ A. they were hungry ‎ B. it rained ‎ C. one said the rain would do good to the crops and the other didn't think so ‎ D. they both hoped for rain ‎ ‎5. The third farmer came with and said to the other two. He _____. ‎ A. wanted to make friends with them B. joined them in the quarrel ‎ C. wanted to know why they were quarreling D. had nothings to do ‎ ‎6. How many farmers said that the rain would be helpful? _____. ‎ A. None B. One C. Two D. Three ‎ Keys: ACACCB 　　‎ ‎ ‎ ‎17‎ In 1620, about half the USA was covered by forests． Today the forests have almost gone． A lot of good land has gone with them, leaving only sand． China doesn't want to copy the USA's example． We're planting more and more trees． We've built the " Great Green Wall" of trees ‎ across northern part of our country．The Great Green Wall is 7,000 kilometres long, and between 400 and 1,700 kilometres wide． It will stop the wind from blowing the earth away． It will stop the sand from moving towards the rich farmland in the south． More "Great Green Walls" are needed． Trees must be grown all over the world． Great Green Walls will make the world better．‎ 根据短文内容，选择正确答案。‎ ‎1．In 1620, about ______ the USA was covered by forests．‎ ‎ A．a third B．half C．two thirds D．a fourth ‎2．A lot of good land has gone with ______．‎ ‎ A．sand B．water C．wind D．forests ‎3．The Great Green Wall in China is ______ long．‎ ‎ A．7,000 kilometers B．1,700 kilometers ‎ ‎ C．7,000 meters D．400 kilometers ‎4．Trees must be grown in ______.‎ ‎ A．China B．the USA ‎ ‎ C．some countries D．every part of the world ‎5．______ will make the world better．‎ ‎ A．The Great Wall B．Tall buildings ‎ ‎ C．Great Green Walls D．Flowers and grass KEY: 1．B 2．D 3．A 4．D 5．C ‎ ‎ ‎18‎ The students were having their chemistry（化学）class. Miss Li was telling the children what water was like. After that, she asked her students, “What's water?” No one spoke for a few minutes．Miss Li asked again，“Why don't you answer my question？Didn't I tell you what water is like？” ‎ Just then a boy put up his hand and said，“Miss Li，you told us that water has no colour and no smell．But where to find such kind of water？The water in the river behind my house is always black and it has a bad smell．”Most of the children agreed With him．‎ ‎“I'm sorry，children．”said the teacher，“Our water is getting dirtier and dirtier．That's a problem． ‎ ‎1．The students were having their _______ class． ‎ ‎ A．English B．Chinese C．chemistry D．maths ‎ ‎2．Miss Li was telling the children what ______ was like． ‎ ‎ A．water B．air C．earth D．weather ‎ ‎3．A boy said，“The water in the river behind my house is always _______．” ‎ ‎ A．white B．black C．clean D．clear ‎ ‎4．Most of the children _______ the boy． ‎ ‎ A．agreed with B．wrote to ‎ ‎ C．heard from D．sent for ‎ ‎5．The water in the river has colour and smell because it is getting _______． ‎ ‎ A．more and more B．less and less ‎ ‎ C．cleaner and cleaner D．dirtier and dirtier ‎ KEY: 1．C 2．A 3．B 4．A 5．D ‎ ‎ ‎19‎ ‎“Cool”is a word with many meanings．Its old meaning is used to express a temperature that is a little bit cold．As the world has changed，the word has had many different meaning． ‎ ‎“Cool”can be used to express feelings of interest in almost anything． ‎ When you see a famous car in the street，maybe you will say，“It's cool．”You may think，“He's ‎ so cool，”when you see your favourite footballer． ‎ We all maximize（扩大） the meaning of “cool”．You can use it instead of many words such as “new” or “surprising”．Here's an interesting story we can use to show the way the word is used．A teacher asked her students to write about the waterfall（瀑布）they had visited．On one student's paper was Just the one sentence，“It's so cool．Maybe he thought it was the best way to show what he saw and felt． ‎ But the story also shows a scarcity（缺乏）of words．Without “cool”，some people have no words to show the same meaning．So it is quite important to keep some credibility（可信性）．Can you think of many other words that make your life as colourful as the word “cool”？ I can．And I think they are also very cool． ‎ ‎1．We know that the word "cool" has had ________. ‎ ‎ A．only one meaning B．no meanings ‎ ‎ C．many different meanings D．the same meaning ‎ ‎2．In the passage，the word “express” means“________”. ‎ ‎ A．see B．show C．know D．feel ‎ ‎3．If you are _______ something，you may say，“It’s cool.” ‎ ‎ A．interested in B．angry about ‎ ‎ C．afraid of D．unhappy with ‎ ‎4．The writer takes an example to show he is ________ the way the word is used． ‎ ‎ A．pleased with B．strange to ‎ ‎ C．worried about D．careful with ‎ ‎5．In the passage，the writer suggests（暗示）that the word “cool”________． ‎ ‎ A．can be used instead of many words ‎ ‎ B．usually means something interesting ‎ ‎ C．can make your life colourful ‎ ‎ D．may not be as cool as it seems ‎ KEY: 1．C 2．B 3．A 4．C 5．D ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎20‎ A friend of mine named Paul received an expensive car from his brother as a Christmas present．On Christmas Eve when Paul came out of his office，a street urchin was walking around the shining car．“Is this your car，Paul？”he asked． ‎ Paul answered，“Yes，my brother gave it to me for Christmas.” The boy was surprised．“You mean your brother gave it to you and it didn't cost you nothing？Boy，I wish…” He hesitated． ‎ Of course Paul knew what he was going to wish for．He was going to wish he had a brother like that. But what the boy said surprised Paul greatly. ‎ ‎“I wish,” the boy went on，“that I could be a brother like that.” Paul looked at the boy in surprise, then he said again, “Would you like to take a ride in my car？” ‎ ‎“Oh yes，I'd love that．” ‎ After a short ride，the boy turned and with his eyes shining，said，“Paul，would you mind driving in front of my house？” ‎ Paul smiled a little．He thought he knew what the boy wanted．He wanted to show his neighbours that he could ride home in a big car. But Paul was wrong again. “Will you stop where those two steps are？” the boy asked． ‎ He ran up to the steps. Then in a short while Paul heard him coming back, but he was not coming fast. He was carrying his little crippled brother. He sat him down on the step and pointed to the car. ‎ ‎“There she is, Buddy, just like I told you upstairs. His brother gave it to him for Christmas and it didn't cost him a cent. And some day I'm going to give you one just like it…then you can see for yourself all the nice things in the Christmas windows that I've been trying to tell you about.” ‎ Paul got out and lifted the boy to the front seat of his car. The shining-eyed older brother climbed in beside him and the three of them began an unforgettable holiday ride. ‎ 注：urchin 顽童 hesitate 犹豫 neighbour 邻居 crippled 残疾 cent 美分 ‎ ‎1．The street urchin was very surprised when ________． ‎ ‎ A．Paul received an expensive car ‎ ‎ B．Paul told him about the car ‎ ‎ C．he saw the shining car ‎ ‎ D．he was walking around the car ‎ ‎2．From the story we can see the urchin ________． ‎ ‎ A．wished to give his brother a car ‎ ‎ B．wanted Paul’s brother to give him a car ‎ ‎ C．wished he could have a brother like Paul's ‎ ‎ D．wished Paul could be a brother like that ‎ ‎3．The urchin asked Paul to stop his car in front of his house ________． ‎ ‎ A．to show his neighbours the big car ‎ ‎ B．to show he had a rich friend ‎ ‎ C．to let his brother ride in the car ‎ ‎ D．to tell his brother about his wish ‎ ‎4．We can infer（推断）from the story that ________． ‎ ‎ A．Paul couldn't understand the urchin ‎ ‎ B．the urchin had a deep love for his brother ‎ ‎ C．the urchin wished to have a rich brother ‎ ‎ D．the urchin's wish came true in the end ‎ ‎5．The best name of the name story is _________． ‎ ‎ A．A Christmas Present ‎ ‎ B．A Street Urchin ‎ ‎ C．A Brother Like That ‎ ‎ D．An Unforgettable Holiday Ride ‎ KEY: 1．B 2．A 3．D 4．B 5．C ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ 任务型阅读 ‎　2008年山东中考题 ‎　　Think of life as a game in which you are playing with five balls in the air. You name them work, family, health, friends and spirit (精神) and you keep all of them in the air. You will soon understand that work is a rubber ball. If you drop it, it will bounce (弹跳) back.‎ ‎　　But the other four balls, family, health, friends and spirit, are made of glasses. If you drop one of these, they will be broken. They will never be the same. You must understand that and try to have balance in your life. How?‎ ‎　　Don’t look down on your worth by comparing yourself with others. It is because we are different and each of us is special.‎ ‎　　Don’t let other people set goals for you. Only you know what is best for yourself.‎ ‎　　Don’t give up when you still have something to give. (83) Nothing is really over until the moment you stop trying.‎ ‎　　Don’t be afraid to fight difficulties. It is by taking chances that we learn how to be brave.‎ ‎　　Don’t shut love out of your life by saying it’s impossible. (84) The quickest way to receive love is to give it; the fastest way to lose love is to hold it too tightly (紧紧地); the best way to keep love is to give it wings.‎ ‎　　Don’t run through life so fast that you forget not only where you’ve been, but also where you are going.‎ ‎　　Don’t be afraid to learn. Knowledge is weightless. It’s a treasure (珍宝) you can always carry easily.‎ ‎　　Don’t use time or words carelessly. You can’t get them back.‎ ‎　　Life is not a competition, but a trip, step by step.‎ ‎　　Yesterday is history, tomorrow is a mystery (秘密), and today is a gift: that’s why we call it “the present”.‎ ‎　　A. 根据短文内容简要回答问题。‎ ‎　　81. What are the five balls of life?‎ ‎　　__________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎　　82. Please say something about knowledge according to the passage.‎ ‎　　__________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎　　B．将短文中划线的两个句子译成汉语。‎ ‎　　83. _________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎　　84. _________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎　　C． 请给短文拟一个适当的标题。‎ ‎　　85.________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ 08山东 ‎（一）答案:‎ ‎81. They are work, family, health, friends and spirit.‎ ‎82. Knowledge is weightless. It’s a treasure you can always carry easily.‎ ‎83. 直到你停止努力的那一刻事情才会真正结束。‎ ‎84. 最快捷的得到爱的方法是给予爱；最快速的失去爱的方法是过紧地握住爱，‎ ‎85. Five Balls of Life ‎（二）评分说明：‎ ‎1、本题共10分，每小题2分。‎ ‎ 2、虽与答案表达方式不同，但与所给参考答案意思一致，无语言错误，也可酌情给分。‎ 中考英语专题复习19 书面表达部分 2010-02-25 17:39:54| 分类： 中考英语专项 | 标签： |字号大 中 小 订阅 ‎ 专题19 书面表达 一、基本句子训练 ‎　　1、通用句式：‎ ‎　　英语句式：（状语）+主语+（状语）+谓语+宾语+（地点状语）+（方式状语）+（时间状语）‎ ‎　　中文句式：主语+（时间状语）+（地点状语）/（方式状语）+谓语+宾语 ‎　　[误] I last Sunday with my father by plane went to Beijing. (中文句式)‎ ‎　　[正] I went to Beijing by plane with my father last Sunday.‎ ‎　　[正] Last Sunday, I and my father went to Beijing by plane.‎ ‎　　2、人称代词和物主代词 ‎　　[误] I have a pet. A pet is called Polly.‎ ‎　　[正] I have a pet. It is called Polly.‎ ‎　　[误] This is my new friend. You can call she Lily.‎ ‎　　[正] This is my new friend. You can call her Lily.‎ ‎　　[误] This is my bike. That is she's bike.‎ ‎　　[正] This is my bike. That is her bike.‎ ‎　　[误] Your shoes are older than my.‎ ‎　　[正] Your shoes are older than mine.‎ ‎　　3、There be 与have ‎　　[误] The table have some flowers.‎ ‎　　[正] There are some flowers on the table.‎ ‎　　[误] There will have a film this evening.‎ ‎　　[正] There will be a film this evening.‎ ‎　　4、Be, do, does, did ‎　　[误] He is live in Canada.‎ ‎　　[正] He lives in Canada.‎ ‎　　[误] Mr. Green is/does sometimes read newspaper.‎ ‎　　[正] Mr. Green sometimes reads newspaper.‎ ‎　　[误] I am not like dogs.‎ ‎　　[正] I don't like dogs.‎ ‎　　[误] Jenny wasn't call me last night.‎ ‎　　[正] Jenny didn't call me last night.‎ ‎　　[误] Our English teacher in the office.‎ ‎　　[正] Our English teacher is in the office.‎ ‎　　5、can, may, must, should, could ‎　　I can sing and dance.‎ ‎　　We should keep quiet in the reading room.‎ ‎　　6、will, shall, be going to ‎　　[误] Jack will comes to China next week.‎ ‎　　[正] Jack will come to China next week.‎ ‎　　We shall go for a picnic next week.‎ ‎　　Mr. Green is going to buy a car next month.‎ ‎　　7、and, but, or, too, also ‎　　My favorite holidays are spring and fall.‎ ‎　　My father likes watching TV. I like watching TV, too.‎ ‎　　[误] October is not too cold and cold in Quanzhou.‎ ‎　　[正] October is not too cold or cold in Quanzhou.‎ ‎　　[误] I like English, and I don't like math.‎ ‎　　[正] I like English, but I don't like math.‎ ‎　　8、sometimes, often, always, usually, never, hardly, all the time ‎　　In the morning, my father always plays sports.‎ ‎　　= In the morning, my father plays sports all the time.‎ ‎　　9、for example, such as,‎ ‎　　We will do some activities, such as going boating, climbing hills, playing games, having a picnic and so on.‎ ‎　　We should help the old. For example, we can clean the house, carry water and tell interesting stories.‎ ‎　　10、作比较 ‎　　I think football is as popular as basketball in America.‎ ‎　　English is not so/as easy as Chinese.‎ ‎　　I think math is more/less interesting than art.‎ ‎　　Of all the subjects, I think English is the most interesting.‎ ‎　　July is the hottest in a year.‎ ‎　　11、复合句 ‎　　[误] If it will be sunny tomorrow, we can play a football game.‎ ‎　　[正] If it is sunny tomorrow, we can play a football game.‎ ‎　　[误] When the summer will come, the weather will get hotter and hotter.‎ ‎　　[正] When the summer comes, the weather will get hotter and hotter.‎ ‎　　12、以事物作主语的句子 ‎　　[误] I hope I will come true my dream.‎ ‎　　[正] I hope my dream will come true.‎ ‎　　[误] Tom happens a traffic accident.‎ ‎　　[正] A traffic accident happened to Tom.‎ ‎　　13、时间状语(位于句首或句末)‎ ‎　　at 6 o'clock, at 7:15=at a quarter past seven ‎ ‎　　at 9 a.m.=at nine in the morning ‎ ‎　　at 6:30 p.m.= at half past six in the afternoon ‎ ‎　　at night/noon, at breakfast,‎ ‎　　in the morning/afternoon/evening/night ‎　　in April, in spring, in 2007, in May, 2007‎ ‎　　in two hours ‎　　He will finish the work in two hours.‎ ‎　　on May19th, 2007 on Saturday on a rainy day ‎　　on Sunday morning on the morning of June1st ‎　　for three years ‎　　I will keep this book for two weeks.‎ ‎　　since five days ago=for five days ‎　　[误] I have been on the football team since five days.‎ ‎　　[正] I have been on the football team since five days ago.‎ ‎　　before/after supper, after school/class ‎　　前面不加介词的时间状语:‎ ‎　　yesterday, today, tomorrow, then,‎ ‎　　the day before yesterday, the day after tomorrow ‎　　just now=a moment ago, from now on, from then on ‎　　last/this/next week ‎　　[误] He hurt his leg on last week.‎ ‎　　[正] He hurt his leg last week.‎ ‎　　at first at the end of the party at last=in the end=finally ‎　　14、方式状语 ‎　　by bike/taxi/car/bus/train/plane/ship/boat/air/sea ‎　　in a/the car/taxi ‎　　on a bike/motorbike/bus/train on foot ‎　　[误] He by bike to school every day.‎ ‎　　[正] He goes to school by bike/on a bike every day.‎ ‎　　[正] He rides a bike to school every day.‎ ‎　　[误] He by train to Beijing yesterday.‎ ‎　　[正] He went to Beijing by train/on a train yesterday.‎ ‎　　[正] He took a train to Beijing yesterday.‎ ‎　　 with my father, with a knife, with a book in his hand,‎ ‎　　15、地点状语 ‎　　at home, at school,‎ ‎　　in Tom's/his home, in Quanzhou, in China,‎ ‎　　in our classroom, in the drawer, in my backpack,‎ ‎　　on the desk, on the/my left, on my seat ‎　　at the front of = in front of, in the front of, at the back of ‎　　behind the door above/below/under the bed, over the river ‎　　next/close to my room, near my school, far from the city,‎ ‎　　out of the window, inside/outside, beside me,‎ ‎　　in the tree on the tree (lie) in bed on the bed ‎　　go/come/get/drive/ride/fly to 地点 ‎　　[误] Welcome to come my house.‎ ‎　　[正] Welcome to come to my house.‎ ‎　　Home/here/there/where前不加任何介词 ‎　　[误] I arrived at home last night.‎ ‎　　[正] I arrived home last night.‎ ‎　　[正] I arrived at my home last night.‎ ‎　　16、开头句 ‎　　It's our duty to protect our environment.‎ ‎　　It is very important to keep healthy.‎ ‎　　My favorite holiday is Spring Festival.‎ ‎　　In China the most important holiday is the Spring Festival.‎ ‎　　Everyone has his dreams. So do I. My dream is to be a famous doctor.‎ ‎　　I want to be a businessman/bob.‎ ‎　　Last Sunday, it was sunny(rainy, windy, foggy,).‎ ‎　　Last summer, my parents and I went to Beijing for our holidays.‎ ‎　　Last Sunday, Class One had a football match with Class Two. All of us went to watch it.‎ ‎　　I' like to tell you something about the out- of-class activity in our school. We usually have activities from 4:50 -- 5:50 in the afternoon.‎ ‎　　I'm glad/happy to hear your good news! If you come to Canada, I will be very excited.‎ ‎　　I'd like to invite you to my birthday party.‎ ‎　　Thank you for your invitation.‎ ‎　　Thank you for inviting me to your party.‎ ‎　　17、结束句 ‎　　If everyone makes contribution to protecting the environment, the world will become much more beautiful.‎ ‎　　I think it is important to protect animals.‎ ‎　　I hope my dream will come true in the future.‎ ‎　　I hope every day can be Spring Festival.‎ ‎　　I thought I would never forget this trip.‎ ‎　　We enjoyed ourselves. = We had fun. =We had a good time.‎ ‎　　What a happy trip!‎ ‎　　How happy we are! I love this trip very much.‎ ‎　　In fact, I have never seen such an exciting match before.‎ ‎　　I will never forget this match.‎ ‎　　Please send me an e-mail soon. Please write to me soon.‎ ‎　　18、中心句: 祈使句，感叹句,‎ ‎　　Please keep the place clean and tidy.‎ ‎　　Don't throw rubbish onto the ground.‎ ‎　　Let's plant more flowers and trees.‎ ‎　　 We must pick up some rubbish and throw it into a dustbin.‎ ‎　　 We should not spit in a public place/ cut down the trees ‎　　 We should do more exercise.‎ ‎　　 I'm allowed to sleep late on weekends.‎ ‎　　 I'm not allowed to stay outside in the night.‎ ‎　　 We can't go to sleep too late.‎ ‎　　 Let's meet at the bus stop at half past five.‎ ‎　　 On the Spring Festival Eve people have a big dinner. They have a lot of nice food to eat.‎ ‎　　 During the Spring Festival people have a lot of interesting to do.‎ ‎　　 People visit their relatives and friends ‎　　 They greet each other with a hug and say, "Happy New Year".‎ ‎　　 English is very important and I like English very much.‎ ‎　　 When I was eight, I wanted to go to a famous college.‎ ‎　　 From now on I'll work harder than before.‎ ‎　　 We visited a lot of places of interest.‎ ‎　　 We bought a lot of things. The clothes there are good and cheap.‎ ‎　　 The match is very exciting .‎ ‎　　 Class One won this match. Class Two got lost.‎ ‎　　 I like pandas best. = My favorite animals are pandas.‎ ‎　　 They thanked me a lot.‎ ‎　　 I hope she'll be better soon.‎ ‎　　 We also have some special interest groups, such as drawing, singing and dancing.‎ ‎　　 We hope to spend more time on sports.‎ ‎　　 It comes in January or February .‎ ‎　二、 应用文训练 ‎　　　　1、 日记 ‎　　　　根据中英文提示，写一篇日记，记叙一次(西塞山)郊游。(短文的开头已经给出。)‎ ‎　　　　要求：1.短文应包括汉语和英语提示内容。 2.语句通顺，意思连贯。‎ ‎　　　　3.书写工整，卷面整洁，标点符号正确。 4.字数不少于80个英语单词。‎ ‎　　　　Sunday, May 1st ‎　　　　I got to school very early. Our class took a special bus to Xisai Mount. We got to ‎　　　　the foot of the mount at 8:30.We began climbing the mount soon. On our way the air was so fresh and the scenery was so beautiful. Everybody was talking and laughing.We reached the top at about 10:00. The Yangtze River appeared in the north, and over ‎　　　　the river there was a great bridge. We felt very relaxed. Seeing some birds flying in ‎　　　　the sky, I suddenly remembered a popular poem of Tang dynasty. " Birds are flying ‎　　　　in front of Xisai Mount ,…". I kept feeling proud of our city.‎ ‎　　　　2、 邀请信 ‎　　　　下星期一是Jenny的生日，她的父母亲要在家里给她办一个晚会。Jenny要邀请些朋友参加，晚会6：30开始。请你帮她写信邀请Jane。日期是5月18日。‎ ‎　　　　May18th ‎　　　　Dear Jane,‎ ‎　　　　I'd like to invite you to join my birthday party. Next Monday is my birthday. My parents will hold a party for me at home. It will begin at half past six. I'm looking forward to seeing you soon.‎ ‎　　　　Sincerely yours,‎ ‎　　　　Jenny ‎　　　　3、 感谢信 ‎　　　　Jenny 邀请Jane在星期一参加生日晚会。但是Jane 那天晚上要参加数学考试，没时间去。请帮Jane写一封信表示感谢，她同时送上一份礼物，以示祝贺。时间是5月20日。‎ ‎　　　　May20th,‎ ‎　　　　Dear Jenny,‎ ‎　　　　I'm glad to hear your good news. Thank you for inviting me to your birthday party. But I'm afraid I can't come. Because I'll have a math exam on Monday evening. Here is a gift for you. I hope you will love it.‎ ‎　　　　Happy birthday!‎ ‎　　　　Sincerely yours,‎ ‎　　　　Jane ‎　　　　4、 书信:‎ ‎　　　　根据中文大意，写出意思连贯、符合逻辑、不少于50词的短文。‎ ‎　　　　假设你叫王明，昨天收到了笔友David的e-mail，得知他不久要到北京来学习中文。他想了解如何学好中文。请你用英文给他回复一封e-mail，介绍学习中文的体会和方法，提出你的建议，以及表达你帮助他学好中文的愿望。‎ ‎　　　　Dear David,‎ ‎　　　　I'm glad to hear that you will come to Beijing to learn Chinese. Chinese is very useful, and many foreigners are learning it now. It is difficult for you because it is quite different from ‎ English. You have to remember as many Chinese words as possible. It is also important to do some reading and writing. You can watch TV and listen to the radio to practice your listening. Do your best to talk with people in Chinese. You can learn Chinese not only from books but also from people around you. If you have any questions, please ask me. I'm sure you will learn Chinese well.‎ ‎　　　　Hope to see you soon in Beijing.‎ ‎　　　　Yours,‎ ‎　　　　Wang Ming ‎　　　　5、 发言稿 ‎　　　　假定你班今天下午要开一次以Keep Our School Clean为主题的英语班会，请以班长的身份准备一篇70词左右的发言稿。‎ ‎　　　　提示：不随地吐痰，不乱扔垃圾，不在墙壁上乱涂乱画，每天保持教室内外清洁等(不要逐句翻译)‎ ‎　　　　Good afternoon, everyone!‎ ‎　　　　We're studying in this school. It's our duty to keep it clean and tidy. It's not polite to spit in public places, such as in the library, in the classroom. We should neither draw pictures on the walls nor throw any litter onto the ground. I think we must make it a rule to do some cleaning every day. If everyone tries his best to do something useful for our school will be more beautiful.‎ ‎　　　　That's all. Thank you!‎ ‎　　　　6、 通知 ‎　　　　A. 明天(星期五)全班同学将去参观科学博物馆(the Science Museum)，由你(班长)通知全体同学。(通知的开头和结尾已给出)内容如下：‎ ‎　　　　1. 早上8点钟在校门口集合，步行前往。‎ ‎　　　　2. 下星期一交一份有关参观的报告。‎ ‎　　　　3. 参观时要认真听，仔细看并记下有趣的东西。‎ ‎　　　　4. 不可在博物馆内大声喧哗及拍照。‎ ‎　　　　5. 带笔和笔记本。‎ ‎　　　　要求：①不要逐句翻译。 ②字数60～80。‎ ‎　　　　Fellow students，‎ ‎　　　　We are going to visit the Science Museum tomorrow. We will meet at the school gate at eight in the morning and we will go there on foot. Take your pens and notebooks with you. We should listen and watch carefully and write down something interesting when you visit the museum. Please don't make any noise in the museum and don't take any pictures. You will have to hand in a report about the visit next Monday.‎ ‎　　　　Thank you.‎ ‎　　　　B. 请你以校长室的名义拟写一个书面通知，告诉同学们明天去参加植树活动。‎ ‎　　　　提示：明天是植树节，天气暖和。你们不上课，去公园植树。早晨八点在学校门口集合，骑自行车去。中午在那里吃饭，请带好水和食物。(词数：50-70words)‎ ‎　　　　NOTICE ‎　　　　Tomorrow is Tree Planting Day.It is warm .You will have no classes.We shall plant trees in the park.We will meet at the school gate at 8:00 in the morning and go there by bike. We will have lunch ‎　　　　there.Please bring some water and food with you.Don't be late.‎ ‎　　　　Headmaster Office ‎　　　　Mar.11,2004‎ ‎　　　　7、 启事(寻物和招领)‎ ‎　　　　A. 假设你叫高迪，是高一(2)班的学生。你在10月16日晚上把一本《牛津高级英汉双解字典》丢在阅览室里，用英语写一则寻物启事，贴在餐厅前的留言板上，请捡到者交给你或你班班长。启事时间：10月17日 ‎　　　　Lost ‎　　　　October 17th ‎　　　　On the evening of October 16th, I left my Oxford Advanced Learner's English-Chinese Dictionary in the reading-room. It is new. Will the finder please send it to me in Class Two, senior Grade One or to our monitor? Thank you very much.‎ ‎　　　　Gao Di ‎　　　　B. 玛丽捡到戒指一枚，她在宿舍门口贴了一张非常简单的失物招领。她的电话是235-0285。请写出这一启事。‎ ‎　　　　8、 广告 ‎　　　　彼得的服装店开张了。请根据提示写一则广告。‎ ‎　　　　Come to, T-shirts ($5, in all colors), sweaters ($17, orange), shoes ($12, green), cheap ‎　　　　Come to Peter's Clothing Store. Do you like T-shirts? Do you like them cheap? We have T-shirts in all colors at $5 each. Do you need sweaters and shoes? We have orange sweaters for just $17! And green shoes for just $12. And that's not all. Can you believe it? Come down to Peter's and see for yourself!‎ ‎　　　　9、 海报 ‎　　　　请以学生会的名义为中国电影《天下无贼》写一份海报，内容如下：‎ ‎　　　　1. 导演：冯小刚 ‎　　　　2. 名星: 刘德华, 刘若英, 葛尤, 李冰冰 ‎　　　　3. 地点：学校电影院 ‎　　　　4. 时间：2005年11月20日(星期天)下午6:30‎ ‎　　　　5. 组织者：学生会 ‎　　　　6. 海报发出时间：2005年11月14日 ‎　　　　POSTER ‎　　　　A WORLD WITHOUT THIEVES ‎　　　　Chinese film ‎　　　　Director: Feng Xiaogang ‎　　　　Stars: Liu Dehua, Liu Ruoying, Ge You, Li Bingbing ‎　　　　Time: Sunday, at 6:30 p.m. November20th ‎　　　　Place: at the school cinema ‎　　　　Ticket Price: $ 6‎ ‎　　　　the Students' Union ‎　　　　November14th 2005‎ ‎　　　　10、 名片 ‎　　　　陈欣是泉州一中的音乐老师，请为制作一张简易的英文文名片卡，提示如下：‎ ‎　　　　地址：中山路86号邮编：100037‎ ‎　　　　电话：0595-88488970 手机：13501368855 E-mail：Chxin@yahoo.com ‎　　　　School: _______N0.1 Middle School of Quanzhou ‎　　　　Name: Chen Xin ‎　　　　Profession: Music Teacher ‎　　　　Family Address: No.86 Zhongshan Road, Quanzhou ‎　　　　Tel: 0595-88488970 13501368855 (mobile)‎ ‎　　　　E-mail: Chxin@yahoo.com ‎　　　　11、 贺卡 ‎　　　　教师节到了，全班同学要送一份贺卡和一些鲜花给Miss Green, 请你替班级填写这张贺卡。‎ ‎　　　　12、 明信片 ‎　　　　Jenny正在北京玩，她昨天去参观长城，很快乐。她要把长城介绍给她的父母，长城大约6500公里长，用大石头在大山上建成的，她很高兴自己成为一个真正的好汉。请帮她写一份明信片，上面有一张长城的图片。时间是2月4日，星期四。地址是加拿大阿尔伯特省艾得蒙顿市公园路522号。‎ ‎　　　　Thursday, February 4th ‎　　　　Dear Mom and Dad,‎ ‎　　　　We are having fun in Beijing. Yesterday I visited the Great Wall. It is about more than 6500 kilometers long. It is so long and so great. Do you know? It is mostly made of big stones. It ‎ is made at the top of the big mountains. Here is a picture of it for you. I'm proud of myself because I have become a true man.‎ ‎　　　　I miss you.‎ ‎　　　　Love,‎ ‎　　　　Jenny ‎　　　　stamp ‎　　　　Mr. and Mrs. Smith ‎　　　　522 Park Road ‎　　　　Edmonton, Alberta ‎　　　　Canada T2k 5g6‎ ‎　　　　13、 请假条 ‎　　　　假如你叫李明，因患重感冒今明两天不能上学。请你参考下面方框中所给的词语，给你的外籍英语教师写一张请假条，说明你这两天不能上学的原因。‎ ‎　　　　(not feel well, a bad cold, stay in bed, can't go to school, two days, get well soon)‎ ‎　　　　June6‎ ‎　　　　Dear Mr. Green，‎ ‎　　　　I'm sorry to tell you that I am not feeling well. Because I have a bad cold. The doctor says I should stay in bed. And I can't go to school. I have to have two days' off. I think I will get well soon.‎ ‎　　　　Li Ming ‎　　　　14、 留言条 ‎　　　　Sam的妈妈早上很早出门，给他留下一张留言条，要他在家里做一些事情。根据提示，补充这张留言条。‎ ‎　　　　提示：洗车，扫地，洗碗，洗衣，喂狗，练钢琴 ‎　　　　15、 电子邮件 ‎　　　　李明要到加拿大上大学，必须找一间住房。请帮他发一封电子邮件给Jenny, 叫她帮忙找一间较便宜的房间(大约150美元)，因为那里的房租较贵。李明的邮箱是Liming @163.com, Jenny的邮箱是Jenny@compmail.ca ‎　　　　From: Liming @163.com To: Jenny@compmail.ca ‎　　　　Subject Help Rent a Room Date 30/06 9:04AM ‎　　　　Dear Jenny,‎ ‎　　　　I'm going to study in Canada, so I'll have to find a room to live in. I know housing is very expensive there. Please help me find a room at a lower price (about 150 dollars). Please e-mail me if you have any good news. I am looking forward to seeing you soon.‎ ‎　　　　Yours,‎ ‎　　　　Li Ming 三、 命题作文训练 ‎　　　　A. 写人 ‎　　　　1、以" My Mother "为题，用英语写一篇短文。要点：‎ ‎　　　　① 妈妈是护士，在县人民医院工作。她工作努力，工作中严格要求自己，因此，她的同事们对他评价很高;‎ ‎　　　　② 2003年参加抗击"非典"的战斗。为了保护我们免受"非典"的侵害，一个多月没回家。当时，我非常想念妈妈; ③ 我爱妈妈，并为妈妈而自豪。‎ ‎　　　　参考词汇：县 county;　 抗击fight against; 战斗battle;　　　非典 SARS;‎ ‎　　　　My mother ‎　　　　My mother is a nurse. She works in the People's Hospital of our county. She works very hard. She is very strict with herself in the work. So her workmates speak highly of her.‎ ‎　　　　In 2003 she took part in the battle to fight against "SARS". She was away from home for more than one month. So I missed her very much, but I knew she was trying her best to protect us from "SARS" and she was doing an important thing.‎ ‎　　　　I love my mother very much, and I am very proud of having such a great mother. I should learn the spirit of working hard and being strict in the work from her. When I grow up, I ‎ would like to be a person like my mother.‎ ‎　　　　2、根据材料写一篇关于运动员张怡宁的报道：‎ ‎　　　　Name Zhang Yining sex girl City Beijing ‎　　　　Birth 1982.10.5 height 1.68m weight 52 kilos ‎　　　　Achieve -ments 六岁开始学习乒乓球， 在1999年45届世乒赛上(the 45th Table Tennis World Championships)显示非凡的实力，获得亚军。 在2004年的雅典奥运会(Athens Olympic Games)上夺得金牌。在刚刚结束的国际世乒赛(ITTF)上夺得女子单打冠军，成为乒乓球领域中的顶尖。‎ ‎　　　　I'd like to introduce a girl to you. Her name is Zhang Yining. She was born in Beijing in 1982. She is 1.68 meters tall and weighs 52 kilos. At the age of six, she began to play table tennis. In 1999, she won the second at the 45th Table Tennis World Championships. In the 2004 Athens Olympic Games, she won the first. And now she won the women's singles at the ITTF World Cup. She becomes the top of the table tennis field. We hope she will make greater progress in the future.‎ ‎　　　　3、在初中三年的学习生活中，你一定交了不少好朋友，留下了许多美好的回忆。请以"My Best Friend Tom/Mary" 为题，写一篇100词左右的短文，介绍一位你最要好的朋友，男生姓名用Tom;女生姓名用Mary统一代替。‎ ‎　　　　内容要求：1、他/她的外貌特征和个性特点; 2、你们一起经历的一件你印象特别深刻的事情。‎ ‎　　　　注 意：严禁使用真实的校名和姓名 ‎　　　　My Best Friend Tom ‎　　　　Tom is my best friend. He has short hair and wears a pair of glasses. He is shorter but a little bit stronger than I am. In my eyes, he is a clever and brave boy.‎ ‎　　　　One day we went to school by bus together as usual. The bus was so crowded at the rush time. "Oh, my god! Where's my wallet?" A woman beside us cried suddenly. We thought there must be a thief around us, and we tried to help her but failed in the end. The next stop was coming and the woman became more worried. Just then Tom rushed to the driver quickly and told him what happened.‎ ‎　　　　All the passengers were taken to the police station and the thief was caught. We were late for class that morning; however, we felt excited at that unusual experience.‎ ‎　　　　B. 状物 ‎　　　　1、以My hometown为题，介绍家乡的地理、气候、风景、人文和风俗习惯等。字数约80个。‎ ‎　　　　My hometown is in Kunming. Kunming is the capital of Yunnan province. Kunming is also a very beautiful city. It is called the "City of Eternal Spring", because it has spring-like climate all the year round. The Crossbridge Rice Noodles are famous traditional food of Yunnan. There is a famous exposition centre in Kunming. It is in the northern suburbs of Kunming. The Exposition's theme is "Man and Nature -Marching into the 21st Century". And in Yunnan there are twenty-six nationalities. It is a big family. Welcome to my hometown.‎ ‎　　　　2、以My family为题，介绍家庭基本情况，字数约80个。‎ ‎　　　　3、我市刚建成一座图书馆，请根据信息，用英文简短介绍：‎ ‎　　　　1、时间：竣工：2006年6 月; 开放：2006年7月 ‎　　　　2、地址：在中山路，与科学博物馆相邻, 对面是公园。‎ ‎　　　　3、馆内设施：‎ ‎　　　　三层 会议室(22个座位) 电脑室(50台)‎ ‎　　　　二层 卫生间 Room for storing Books (10万册)‎ ‎　　　　一层 咨询台 阅览室 阅览室 Children's Home ‎　　　　A big library has been built for people in our city. It was finished in June, 2006. It will be open in July. The library is on Zhongshan Road, next to the Science Museum. On the other side of the road, there's a park. There are three floors in the library. On the first floor, there are two reading rooms, and there're many kinds of books in it. On the second floor, there is a washing room and a room for storing books. It has about 10,000 books. On the third floor, there's a big meeting room and a computer room. The computer room has fifty computers. Books are my best friends. We should love books. Because they give us knowledge and make us happy.‎ ‎　　　　4、中国加入 WTO 后，有一大批外国人来我市--泉州参观。假设你是导游，请根据以下内容，向外宾简单介绍我市的情况。‎ ‎　　　　要求： 1. 100 词左右; 2. 要点包括： a. 有悠久的历史，位于福建省的东部，离福州 198 公里，人口约 524 万。 b. 有许多名胜古迹，如清源山;东湖等等;东湖是一个很美丽的地方，湖水清澈，无污染;湖中有各种各样的鱼;你可以到那里划船，野餐，钓鱼，是度假的好去处。你也可以去参观市博物馆，在那里你可以看到许多恐龙化石( fossil )。c. 祝大家在泉州玩得愉快。‎ ‎　　　　Ladies and gentlemen,‎ ‎　　　　Welcome to Quan Zhou, now let me introduce our city -Quan Zhou to you. Quan Zhou is a city with a long history. It is in the northeast of Guangdong and 198 kilometers away from Guangzhou. It has a population of 5,240,000.‎ ‎　　　　There are many places of interest in Quan Zhou, such as Qingyuan Mountain, East Lake and so on. East Lake is a beautiful place. The water is clean and not polluted. There are all kinds of fish in it. You can go boating, go fishing and have a picnic there. It is really a good place to spend your holiday. Besides, you can go and visit Quan Zhou n Museum. There you can see a lot of dinosaur egg fossils.‎ ‎　　　　I hope you can enjoy yourselves in Quan Zhou.‎ ‎　　　　Thank you.‎ ‎　　　　C. 记事 ‎　　　　1、根据中文提示和英文提示词语，写一篇意思连贯、符合逻辑的短文。所给英文提示词语必须用上。字数60～70左右。‎ ‎　　　　1、昨天晚上我和妈妈出去散步。　　2、在路上我遇到了一个外国人。‎ ‎　　　　3、他向我询问去温泉饭店(the　Hot　Spring　Hotel)的路。‎ ‎　　　　4、我告诉他沿着路往前走，在第三个转弯处向左拐就能看见饭店。‎ ‎　　　　5、他非常感谢我，我也为能帮他而感到高兴。‎ ‎　　　　提示词语：go out for a walk, on the road, the way to, walk along, on the left, thank for, be happy that ‎　　　　Yesterday evening, I went out for a walk with my mother. On the road, we met a foreigner. He asked me the way to the Hot Spring Hotel. I told him to walk along the road and take the third turning on the left, then he could see the hotel. He thanked me very much for my help. I was happy that I could help him.‎ ‎　　　　D. 议论 ‎　　　　1、同学们，看到下面的四幅图片及相应的报道后，你感到最担忧的是哪两种情形?请简述你担忧的理由并提出建议或希望。要求：‎ ‎　　　　⒈ 从所给素材中任选两种情形进行阐述，不可多选或少选。‎ ‎　　　　⒉ 条理清楚，意思连贯，语句通顺，标点正确;⒊ 词数 80 ～ 100。‎ ‎　　　　参考词汇： 建议 suggest v. suggestion n.气体 gas n.　 污染 pollution n.‎ ‎　　　　THE POLLUTIONS ‎　　　　① One third of the world's people don't have enough clean water.‎ ‎　　　　② More and more diseases are caused by polluted air.‎ ‎　　　　③ People are disturbed quite often by kinds of noises.‎ ‎　　　　④ Every person in our city makes about 1.8 kilos of rubbish every day.‎ ‎　　　　The environment is becoming worse and worse. There are many kinds of pollution I worry about. The most serious two are water pollution and air pollution, because people can't live healthily with dirty water and polluted air, nor can animals. More and more diseases are caused by polluted air.‎ ‎　　　　I think factories should not pour dirty water into the river directly or produce more waste gas. We'd better go on foot or by like instead of by car, because more cars mean more waste gas. We should make our world more and more beautiful.‎ ‎　　　　E. 任务型小作文 ‎　　　　1、Li Lei生病，去看医生，请帮他描述病情，并帮医生向Li Lei提建议。‎ ‎　　　　Li Lei: I'm not feeling well today. I think I have a headache. And I have got a cough._____.(不少于2句)‎ ‎　　　　Doctor: You should eat some medicine and lie down for a rest. You had better drink more water. Don't talk too much. (不少于3个建议)‎ ‎　　　　2、小明和小华是在"手拉手"活动中结成的一对学习伙伴。前不久，小明来信向小华询问如何学好英语。请你以小华的名义给他写封回信。内容包括：‎ ‎　　　　A、学习英语的基本方法 ( listen carefully; speak much; read widely; learn...by heart; practice writing;...) ;‎ ‎　　　　B.你的体会和其他建议。‎ ‎　　　　词数：80词左右。信的开头与结尾已为你写好，不计入总词数。‎ ‎　　　　Dear Xiao Ming,‎ ‎　　　　I'm glad to receive your letter. In your letter you asked me about how to learn English well. I think you must listen carefully and be active in class. Speak as much as possible. Don't be afraid of making mistakes. You'd better read widely and learn some important parts by heart. You should practice writing often. Of course there are many other ways.‎ ‎　　　　You can also see English films, learn to sing English songs or make pen pals with foreigners. They are all very helpful. Nothing is difficult if you put your heart into it. I'm sure you'll learn English well.‎ ‎　　　　Yours,‎ ‎　　　　Xiao Hua ‎　　　　3、假如你是泉州清源山风景区的管理人员，请你用英语为游客订出一些规章制度，内容包括：环境卫生保护、森林防火安全、乱涂乱刻(crave)、树木保护、人身安全等，至少5句。‎ ‎　　　　Notice to the Tourists ‎　　　　1、Please keep the place clean and tidy.‎ ‎　　　　2、Don't throw rubbish onto the ground.‎ ‎　　　　3、No smoking is allowed.‎ ‎　　　　4、Don't use fire on the mountains.‎ ‎　　　　5、Don't cut down the trees ‎　　　　6、Don't crave on the trees.‎ ‎　　　　Please be careful when you climb up and down the mountains.‎ ‎ 四、 重视检查 ‎　　　　1、 主谓一致：‎ ‎　　　　2、 时态搭配 ‎　　　　3、 状语 ‎　　　　4、 名词复数 ‎　　　　5、 单词拼写 ‎　　　　五、 常考主题的典型句子 ‎　　　　1、 环保 ‎　　　　1. It's our duty to protect our environment.‎ ‎　　　　2. It is very important to take care of our environment ‎　　　　3. We should not throw litter onto the ground ‎　　　　4. We should not spit in a public place/ cut down the trees ‎　　　　5. We should plant more flowers and trees.‎ ‎　　　　6. We must pick up some rubbish and throw it into a dustbin ‎　　　　7. If everyone makes contribution to protecting the environment, the world will become much more beautiful.‎ ‎　　　　2、 旅游 ‎　　　　1. Last Sunday(Saturday,…) ,it was sunny(rainy, windy, foggy,)‎ ‎　　　　2. I got up very early (late). After breakfast I went to …with my friends by bike, bus，…‎ ‎　　　　3. We enjoyed ourselves.‎ ‎　　　　4. We forgot the time. We didn't come back until 5 o'clock.‎ ‎　　　　5. We all felt very tired, but we were happy.‎ ‎　　　　6. I thought I would never forget this trip.‎ ‎　　　　7. Last summer, my parents and I went to Beijing for our holidays.‎ ‎　　　　8. We visited a lot of places of interest.‎ ‎　　　　9. We had a good time there.‎ ‎　　　　10. We bought a lot of things. The clothes here are good and cheap.‎ ‎　　　　3、 比赛 ‎　　　　1. Last Sunday, Class One had a football match with Class Two.‎ ‎　　　　2. All of us went to watch it.‎ ‎　　　　3. The match was very exciting.‎ ‎　　　　4. In fact, I have never seen such an exciting match before.‎ ‎　　　　5. The score was 5-3. Our team scored three goals in the last fifteen minutes.‎ ‎　　　　6. Class One won this match. Class Two lost.‎ ‎　　　　7. Class One played well. They deserved to win.‎ ‎　　　　8. Their PE teacher was very pleased with their performance.‎ ‎　　　　4、 健康 ‎　　　　1. It is very important to keep healthy.‎ ‎　　　　2. How can we keep healthy?‎ ‎　　　　3. We can't go to sleep too late. We can't get up too late.‎ ‎　　　　4. We should eat the food healthily.‎ ‎　　　　5. We should do more exercise.‎ ‎　　　　6. Last Tuesday I got a cold and had a pain in my head.‎ ‎　　　　7. I didn't feel like eating anything.‎ ‎　　　　8. I decided to see the doctor.‎ ‎　　　　9. In the doctor's office, the doctor looks over me carefully.‎ ‎　　　　10. He said :"Nothing serious." And he told me to take a rest and drink more water.‎ ‎　　　　11. A nurse gave me an injection. It was a little painful.‎ ‎　　　　12. The doctor asked me to take the medicine three times a day.‎ ‎　　　　13. A few days later, I felt better. From then on I believe that keeping healthy is the most important thing in the world.‎ ‎　　　　5、 学科 ‎　　　　1. My favorite subject is English.‎ ‎　　　　2. More than three quarters of the information on the Internet is in English.‎ ‎　　　　3. It is used by travelers and business people all over the world.‎ ‎　　　　4. China has joined the WTO and the Olympic Games will be held in China. English becomes more and more useful.‎ ‎　　　　5. So English is very important and I like English very much.‎ ‎　　　　6. We have a lot of fun in the English class.‎ ‎　　　　7. Our English teacher often makes us happy in the English class.‎ ‎　　　　8. I hope I can go abroad one day, and then I can speak to foreigners in English.‎ ‎　　　　9. I like English and try my best to learn it.‎ ‎　　　　6、 节日 ‎　　　　1. In China the most important holiday is the Spring Festival.‎ ‎　　　　2. It comes in January or February.‎ ‎　　　　3. On the Spring Festival Eve people have a big dinner. They have a lot of nice food to eat.‎ ‎　　　　4. During the Spring Festival people have a lot of interesting things to do.‎ ‎　　　　5. People visit their relatives and friends.‎ ‎　　　　6. They greet each other with a hug and say, "Happy New Year".‎ ‎　　　　7. As China is a big country, people in different places celebrate this holiday in different ways.‎ ‎　　　　7、 写人 ‎　　　　1. His name is Jack.‎ ‎　　　　2. He was born in London in 1982.‎ ‎　　　　3. He is 1.68 meters tall and weighs 52 kilos.‎ ‎　　　　4. He is 20 years old.‎ ‎　　　　5. He comes from England.‎ ‎　　　　6. He is a good ping-pong player.‎ ‎　　　　7. He is medium build.‎ ‎　　　　8. He has short hair.‎ ‎　　　　9. He is outgoing. Every one likes to talk with him. He gets on well with us.‎ ‎　　　　10. He teaches English very well.‎ ‎　　　　11. He works very hard. He works in No.5 Middle School.‎ ‎　　　　12. He loves watching football games after work.‎ ‎　　　　13. He often helps me with my English.‎ ‎　　　　14. At the age of six, he began to play table tennis.‎ ‎　　　　8、 生活 ‎　　　　1. Jim got up very early.‎ ‎　　　　2. Jim cleaned the room and do the housework.‎ ‎　　　　3. Jim went to shop and did some shopping.‎ ‎　　　　4. Jim did some cooking.‎ ‎　　　　5. Jim fed the cat.‎ ‎　　　　6. Jim sweeps the floor.‎ ‎　　　　7. He washes the dishes.‎ ‎　　　　8. He has lunch at school.‎ ‎　　　　9. It is a busy day. He is very tired. But he feels happy.‎ ‎ ‎ 常用书面表达提示语 ‎1..Write　at　least　60　words　according　to　the　given　topic “Computer　games　and　our　eyesight”（以”电脑游戏与我们的视力”为题写话，词数不少于60个，标点符号不占格）：‎ How　do　students　like　playing　computer　games　in　your　class?‎ Is　it　good　or　bad　for　eyesight　if　they　spend　much　time　in　the　computer　room?　Why?　　‎ Would　you　give　your　kind　advice　to　them?‎ ‎2.Write　at　least　60　words　　about　the　topic “My　15th　Birthday” according　to　the　given　questions(根据所给问题提示写话，不少于60个词)‎ When　did　you　have　your　15th　birthday party?‎ Who　came　to　the　party?‎ What　did　you　do　at　the　party?‎ ‎3.Write　at　least　sixty　words　about　the　topic“My　Wish”（根据英文提示，以”我的愿望“为题写话，不少于六十个词，内容必须包括英文提示中的3项要求，标点符号不占格）：　　‎ What　is　your　wish?(What　do　you　want　to　be　in　the　future?　What　do　you　want　to　have　one　day?) ‎ Why　is　it　your　wish?‎ what　will　you　do　to　make　your　wish　come true?‎ ‎4.Everyone　has　his　dream. Now　write　at　least　60　words　on　the　topic“My　dream”.（以“我的梦想”为题写一篇短文，至少60个单词）：‎ ‎5.Use　the　suggested　questions　as　clues. Write　at　least　60　words　on　the　topic “The　Happiest　Day　in　My　Life”（以“我最幸福的一天”为题，写一段至少60个词的短文，标点符号不计在内，要求内容切题，意思连贯。下列问题供参考）：‎ What　happened　one　day？(When? Where? Who?)‎ ‎ How　did　you　feel?‎ Why　was it　the　happiest　day　in　your　life?　‎ ‎6.Write　at　least　60　words　on　the　topic“My　junior　school　Life（根据文字提示，以“我的初中生涯”为题写话，字数不少于60词）：　　Suggested　questions: ‎ Do　you　like　your　school?　Why　or　Why　not?　　‎ what　have　you　learned　in　your　school?　　‎ What　do　you　think　of　your　teachers　and　classmates?‎ Is　your　school　life　interesting　and　meaningful?‎